WD Y57

5.
DLP HIGH-DEFINITION
TELEVISION
MODELS
WD-Y57aa
WD-Y65
WD-57732
WD-65732
WD-73732
OWNERS GUIDE
Forquestions:
- CallConsumerRelationsat800-332-2119.
- E-mailusatMDEAservice@mdea.com.
- Visitourwebsiteatwww.mitsubishi-tv.com.
ForinformationonDemo ModeandSystem Reset,pleaseseethebackcover.
Toorderreplacementoradditionalremotecontrols,lampcartridges,orOwnersGuides,visit
ourwebsiteatwww.mitsuparts.comorcall800-553-7278.
GuidelinesforsettingupandusingyournewwidescreenTVstartonpage34.
Thelightningflashwitharrowheadsymbolwithinanequilateraltriangleisintendedtoalerttheuserofthe
presenceofuninsulateddangerousvoltagewithintheproductsenclosurethatmaybesufficientmagni-
tudetoconstituteariskofelectricshock.
Theexclamationpointwithinanequilateraltriangleisintendedtoalerttheusertothepresenceofimpor-
tantoperatingandmaintenance(servicing)instructionsintheliteratureaccompanyingtheappliance.
CAUTION
CAUTION:TOREDUCETHERISKOFELECTRICSHOCK,DONOTREMOVECOVER(ORBACK).NOUSERSER-
VICEABLEPARTSINSIDE.REFERSERVICINGTOQUALIFIEDSERVICEPERSONNEL.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
C A U T I O N
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
FCC Declaration of Conformity
Product: ProjectionTelevisionReceiver
Models: WD-Y57,WD-Y65,WD-57732,WD-65732,WD-73732
ResponsibleParty: MitsubishiDigitalElectronicsAmerica,Inc.
9351JeronimoRoad
Irvine,CA92618-1904
Telephone: (800)332-2119
ThisdevicecomplieswithPart15oftheFCCRules.Operationissubjecttothefollowingtwoconditions:
(1) Thisdevicemaynotcauseharmfulinterference,and
(2) thisdevicemustacceptanyinterferencereceived,includinginterferencethatmaycauseundesiredoperation.
Note:ThisequipmenthasbeentestedandfoundtocomplywiththelimitsforaClassBdigitaldevice,pursuantto
part15oftheFCCRules.Theselimitsaredesignedtoprovidereasonableprotectionagainstharmfulinterferenceina
residentialinstallation.Thisequipmentgenerates,usesandcanradiateradiofrequencyenergyand,ifnotinstalledand
usedinaccordancewiththeinstructions,maycauseharmfulinterferencetoradiocommunications.However,thereis
noguaranteethatinterferencewillnotoccurinaparticularinstallation.Ifthisequipmentdoescauseharmfulinterfer-
encetoradioortelevisionreception,whichcanbedeterminedbyturningtheequipmentoffandon,theuserisencour-
agedtotrytocorrecttheinterferencebyoneormoreofthefollowingmeasures:
Reorientorrelocatethereceivingantenna.
Increasetheseparationbetweentheequipmentandthereceiver.
Connecttheequipmentintoanoutletonacircuitdifferentfromthattowhichthereceiverisconnected.
Consultthedealeroranexperiencedradio/TVtechnicianforhelp.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Mitsubishi could cause harmful interference and would
void the users authority to operate this equipment.
For Your Records
Recordthemodelnumber,serialnumber,andpurchasedateofyourTV.Themodelandserialnumbersareonthe
backoftheTV.RefertothispagewhenrequestingassistancewiththisTV.
MODEL NUMBER (check one):
WD-Y57 WD-Y65 WD-57732 WD-65732 WD-73732
SERIAL NUMBER
PURCHASE DATE
Retailer Information
RETAILER NAME
LOCATION

Our Thanks...
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi as your premier Home Entertainment provider
This Owners Guide describes the features and functions of your Mitsubishi
widescreen, high definition TV. We urge you to examine this Owners Guide to
become familiar with the innovative features and operations this unique television
offers.
The very core of our corporate philosophy is to provide our customers with the
very best. Our development team at Mitsubishi has worked to provide you with
a television that defines state-of-the-art, with the capability to meet your needs
now and in the future.
Whether this is your first Mitsubishi electronic product, or an addition to your
Mitsubishi collection, we believe you and your family will continue to enjoy your
Mitsubishi home theater for many years.
Thank you,
Mitsubishi Digital Electronics America, Inc.
Contents
Important Information About Your TV
GeneralWarningsandCautions,NotesonInstallationandOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
CleaningRecommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ImportantSafeguards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Chapter 1: Television Overview
PackageContents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
SpecialFeaturesofYourTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
TVFrontPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TVBackPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
CableCARDTechnology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Chapter 2: TV Connections
ConnectionTypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
DigitalVideoandHomeRecording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
HDTVCableBoxorSatelliteReceiverwithComponentVideo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
StandardCableBox,SatelliteReceiver,orOtherDevicewithS-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
WallOutletCable(nocablebox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
AntennawithaSingleLead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
AntennaswithSeparateUHFandVHFLeads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
VCRtoanAntennaorWallOutletCable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
VCRtoaCableBox(Audio&Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
HDMIDevice(CableBox,SatelliteReceiver,DVDPlayer,orOtherDevice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
DVIVideoDevice(CableBox,SatelliteReceiver,DVDPlayer,orOtherDevice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
DVDPlayerwithComponentVideo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
A/VReceiver(SoundSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
OlderCableBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
IEEE1394Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
IREmitterNetCommandandTVGuideOnScreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
HelpfulHintsforNetCommandConnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Chapter 3: TV Setup
GuidelinesforSettingUpandUsingYourNewWidescreenTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
WhenYouFirstPowerOntheTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
UsingtheTVsSetupMenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
WhenYouFirstConnectaDevice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
InitialNetCommandSetup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
AdditionalSetupUsingtheNetCommandMenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Chapter 4: TV Operation and Features
RemoteControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
ChoosingaProgramSource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
ChannelViewChannelListings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
StatusDisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
SplitScreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
TVSignalsandDisplayFormats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
MemoryCardPlayback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Chapter 5: TV Menu Settings
3DGraphical MenuSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
MainMenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
SetupMenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NetCommandMenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
ChannelMenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
CaptionsMenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
ParentalLockMenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
SettingaPassCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
LockTVbyTimeandFront-PanelLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
RatingMenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
BypassingtheRatingsLockandLockbyTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
V-ChipSignalInformation
TVRatings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
MovieRatings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Audio/VideoMenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
AudioSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
VideoSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Chapter 6: NetCommand Functions
NetCommand-ControlledDevicesandtheInputSelectionMenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
NetCommand-ControlledRecording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
UsingIEEE1394Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Chapter 7: Using the TV with a Personal Computer
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
VideoAdjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
ConnectingaComputertotheTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
AdjustingImageResolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
ComputerDisplayFormats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Appendices
AppendixA:BypassingtheParentalLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
AppendixB:Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
AppendixC:LampCartridgeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
AppendixD:ProgrammingtheRemoteControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
AppendixE:Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Trademark and License Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Mitsubishi TV Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Mitsubishi DLP Projection Television Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6 Important Information About Your TV
Important Information About Your TV
WARNING:ThisproductcontainschemicalsknowntotheStateofCaliforniatocausecancerand/orbirthdefectsor
otherreproductiveharm.
CAUTION:TOPREVENTELECTRICSHOCK,MATCHWIDEBLADEOFPLUGTOWIDESLOT,FULLYINSERT.
TV WEIGHT:ThisTVisheavy!Exerciseextremecarewhenliftingormovingit.LiftormovetheTVwithaminimum
oftwoadults.TopreventdamagetotheTV,avoidjarringormovingitwhileitisturnedon.AlwayspoweroffyourTV
beforemovingit.
Installation Notes
Stand Requirement
CAUTION:UsetheseMitsubishiTVmodelsonlywiththe
Mitsubishistandmodelsshownhere.Otherstandscan
resultininstabilityandpossiblycauseinjury.
TV Model Stand Model
WD-Y57 MB-57GB
WD-Y65 MB-65GB
WD-57732 MB-57GB
WD-65732 MB-65GB
WD-73732 MB-73GB
Custom cabinet installation must allow for proper air circulation around the television.
NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER: THISREMINDERISPROVIDEDTOCALLTHECATVSYSTEMINSTALLERS
ATTENTIONTOARTICLE820-40OFTHENECTHATPROVIDESGUIDELINESFORTHEPROPERGROUNDINGAND,
INPARTICULAR,SPECIFIESTHATTHECABLEGROUNDSHALLBECONNECTEDTOTHEGROUNDINGSYSTEMOF
THEBUILDING,ASCLOSETOTHEPOINTOFCABLEENTRYASPRACTICAL.
Operating Notes
Standby Fan
WhentheTVisoff,youmayhearalow-powerstandby
fan.Thisisnormaloperation.Thefancoolsadvanced
circuitryinthisTVthatmustcontinuetooperateeven
whentheTVisturnedoff.
Demo Mode
ThisTVhasademomodeforuseinretailstores.Toturn
offdemomode:
1. PressMENU.
2. WhentheMainmenuappearswithSetuphighlighted,
pressENTER.
3. WhentheSetupmenuopens,press tohighlightthe
on-screenDemo Mode Offbutton.
4. PressENTER.
TV Guide On Screen Access Requirements
TVGuideOnScreenlistingsarenotprovidedby
MitsubishiDigitalElectronicsAmerica,Inc.Operationof
TVGuideOnScreenrequiresover-the-airorcableaccess
tostationscarryingTVGuideOnScreenprogramlistings.
Iflistingsarenotavailableinyourareaorbecomediscon-
tinuedbythelocalprovider,TVGuideOnScreenwillnot
operate.TVGuideOnScreendoesnotprovideprogram
listingsforsatelliteTVsystems.
Lamp Replacement
Forlamp-replacementinstructions,seeAppendixC.
To Order a Replacement Lamp Under Warranty
Call(800)553-7278.Pleasehavemodelnumber,serial
number,andTVpurchasedateavailable.
Important:Alllampsreplacedunderwarrantymustbe
returnedtoMitsubishiwheretheywillbeinspectedfor
defectverification.
To Purchase a Replacement Lamp After Warranty
Visitourwebsiteatwww.mitsuparts.comorcall
(800)553-7278.Orderanewlampbypartnumberas
shownbelow.
TV Model Number Lamp Part Number
WD-Y57,WD-Y65,
WD-57732,WD-65732
915P049010
WD-73732 915P049020
Important Information About Your TV 7
TV Software
Unauthorized Software
DonotattempttoupdatethesoftwareofthisTVwith
softwareorcardsthatarenotprovidedbyorauthorized
byMitsubishiDigitalElectronicsAmerica,Inc.Non-autho-
rizedsoftwaremaydamagetheTVandwillnotbecovered
bythewarranty.
Cleaning Recommendations
Normally,lightdustingwithadry,non-scratchingduster
willkeepyourTVclean.Ifcleaningbeyondthisisneeded,
pleaseusethefollowingguidelines:
First,turnofftheTVandunplugthepowercordfromthe
poweroutlet.
Top and Sides of the TV
GentlywipedownyourTVwithasoft,non-abrasive
clothsuchascottonflanneloracleanclothdiaper,
lightlymoistenedwithwater.Drywithaseconddry,
soft,non-abrasivecloth.
Foroilydirt,addafewdropsofmildliquiddetergent,
suchasdishwashingdetergent,tothewaterusedto
moistenthecloth.Rinsewithasecondclothmoist-
enedonlywithwater.Drywithathirddry,soft,non-
abrasivecloth.
Screen
Followtheinstructionsforthetopandsides,wiping
gentlyinanupanddownmotion,followingthe
groovesinthescreen.
Cleantheentirescreenevenly,notjustsectionsofthe
screen.
Donotallowliquidtodripdownthegroovesofthe
screen,assomeliquidmayentertheTVthroughthe
gapbetweenthescreenandscreenframe.
YoumaypurchaseMitsubishiScreenCleaner,part
numberCLEANER-VSS,bycalling(800)553-7278.
General Cleaning Precautions
DONOTallowliquidtoentertheTVthroughtheventi-
lationslotsoranycrevice.
DONOTuseanystrongorabrasivecleaners,asthese
canscratchthesurfaces.
DONOTuseanycleanerscontainingammonia,
bleach,alcohol,benzene,orthinners,asthesecan
dullthesurfaces.
DONOTsprayliquidsorcleanersdirectlyontheTVs
surfaces.
DONOTscruborrubtheTVharshly.Wipeitgently.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use any kind of abrasive cleaner
on the surface of the TV screen.
8 Important Information About Your TV 8 Important Information About Your TV
Important Safeguards
PleasereadthefollowingsafeguardsforyourTVandretainforfuturereference.Alwaysfollowallwarningsandinstruc-
tionsmarkedonthetelevision.
1. Read, Retain and Follow All Instructions
ReadallsafetyandoperatinginstructionsbeforeoperatingtheTV.Retainthesafetyandoperatinginstructions
forfuturereference.Followalloperatinganduseinstructions.
2. Heed Warnings
Adheretoallwarningsontheapplianceandintheoperatinginstructions.
3. Cleaning
UnplugtheTVfromthewalloutletbeforecleaning.Donotuseliquid,abrasiveoraerosolcleaners.Cleaners
canpermanentlydamagethecabinetandscreen.Usealightlydampenedclothforcleaning.
4. Attachments and Equipment
Neveraddanyattachmentsand/orequipmentwithoutapprovalofthemanufacturerassuchadditionsmay
resultintheriskoffire,electricshockorotherpersonalinjury.
5. Water and Moisture
DonotusetheTVwherecontactwithorimmersioninwaterispossible.Donotusenearbathtubs,wash
bowls,kitchensinks,laundrytubs,swimmingpools,etc.
6. Accessories
DonotplacetheTVonanunstablecart,stand,tripod,ortable.TheTVmayfall,
causingseriousinjurytoachildoradultandseriousdamagetotheTV.Useonlywitha
cart,stand,tripod,bracketortablerecommendedbythemanufacturer,orsoldwiththe
TV.AnymountingoftheTVshouldfollowthemanufacturersinstructions,andshould
usemountingaccessoriesrecommendedbythemanufacturer.
Anapplianceandcartcombinationshouldbemovedwithcare.Quickstops,excessive
force,andunevensurfacesmaycausetheapplianceandcartcombinationtooverturn.
7. Ventilation
SlotsandopeningsinthecabinetareprovidedforventilationandtoensurereliableoperationoftheTVandto
protectitfromoverheating.DonotblocktheseopeningsorallowthemtobeobstructedbyplacingtheTVon
abed,sofa,rug,orothersimilarsurface.Norshoulditbeplacedoveraradiatororheatregister.IftheTVisto
beplacedinarackorbookcase,ensurethatthereisadequateventilationandthatthemanufacturersinstruc-
tionshavebeenadheredto.
8. Power Source
ThisTVshouldbeoperatedonlyfromthetypeofpowersourceindicatedonthemarkinglabel.Ifyouarenot
sureofthetypeofpowersuppliedtoyourhome,consultyourappliancedealerorlocalpowercompany.
9. Grounding or Polarization
ThisTVisequippedwithapolarizedalternatingcurrentlineplughavingonebladewiderthantheother.This
plugwillfitintothepoweroutletonlyoneway.Ifyouareunabletoinserttheplugfullyintotheoutlet,tryrevers-
ingtheplug.Iftheplugshouldstillfailtofit,contactyourelectriciantoreplaceyourobsoleteoutlet.Donot
defeatthesafetypurposeofthepolarizedplug.
10. Power-Cord Protection
Power-supplycordsshouldberoutedsothattheyarenotlikelytobewalkedonorpinchedbyitemsplaced
uponoragainstthem,payingparticularattentiontocordsatplugs,conveniencereceptacles,andthepoint
wheretheyexitfromtheTV.
11. Lightning
ForaddedprotectionforthisTVduringalightningstorm,orwhenitisleftunattendedandunusedforlong
periodoftime,unplugitfromthewalloutletanddisconnecttheantennaorcablesystem.Thiswillprevent
damagetotheTVduetolightningandpower-linesurges.
Important Information About Your TV 9 Important Information About Your TV 9
Important Safeguards, continued
12. Power Lines
Anoutsideantennasystemshouldnotbelocatedinthevicinityofoverheadpowerlinesorotherelectriclightor
powercircuits,orwhereitcanfallintosuchpowerlinesorcircuits.Wheninstallinganoutsideantennasystem,
extremecareshouldbetakentokeepfromtouchingsuchpowerlinesorcircuitsascontactwiththemmightbe
fatal.
13. Overloading
Donotoverloadwalloutletsandextensioncordsasthiscanresultinariskoffireorelectricshock.
14. Object and Liquid Entry
NeverpushobjectsofanykindintothisTVthroughopeningsastheymaytouchdangerousvoltagepointsor
short-outpartsthatcouldresultinfireorelectricshock.NeverspillliquidofanykindonorintotheTV.
15. Outdoor Antenna Grounding
IfanoutsideantennaorcablesystemisconnectedtotheTV,besure
theantennaorcablesystemisgroundedsoastoprovidesomepro-
tectionagainstvoltagesurgesandbuilt-upstaticcharges.
Article810oftheNationalElectricCode,ANSI/NFPANo.70-2002,
providesinformationwithrespecttopropergroundingofthemast
andsupportingstructure,groundingoftheleadinwiretoanantenna
dischargeunit,sizeofgroundingconductors,locationofantennadis-
chargeunit,connectiontogroundingelectrodes,andrequirements
forthegroundingelectrode.
16. Servicing
DonotattempttoservicethisTVyourselfasopeningorremoving
coversmayexposeyoutodangerousvoltageorotherhazards.Referallservicingtoqualifiedserviceperson-
nel.
17. Damage Requiring Service
UnplugtheTVfromthewalloutletandreferservicingtoqualifiedservicepersonnelunderthefollowingcondi-
tions:
(a) Whenthepower-supplycordorplugisdamaged.
(b) Ifliquidhasbeenspilled,orobjectshavefallenintotheTV.
(c) IftheTVhasbeenexposedtorainorwater.
(d) IftheTVdoesnotoperatenormallybyfollowingtheoperatinginstructions,adjustonlythosecontrolsthat
arecoveredbytheoperatinginstructionsasanimproperadjustmentofothercontrolsmayresultindamage
andwilloftenrequireextensiveworkbyaqualifiedtechniciantorestoretheTVtoitsnormaloperation.
(e) IftheTVhasbeendroppedorthecabinethasbeendamaged.
(f) WhentheTVexhibitsadistinctchangeinperformance-thisindicatesaneedforservice.
18. Replacement Parts
Whenreplacementpartsarerequired,besuretheservicetechnicianhasusedreplacementpartsspecifiedby
themanufacturerorhavethesamecharacteristicsastheoriginalpart.Unauthorizedsubstitutionsmayresultin
fire,electricshockorotherhazards.
19. Safety Check
UponcompletionofanyserviceorrepairtotheTV,asktheservicetechniciantoperformsafetychecksto
determinethattheTVisinsafeoperatingcondition.
20. Heat
Theproductshouldbesituatedawayfromheatsourcessuchasradiators,heatregisters,stovesorotherprod-
ucts(includingamplifiers)thatproduceheat.
ANTE NNA
LE AD IN WIR E
ANTE NNA
DIS CHAR GE UNIT
(NE C AR TICLE 810-20)
GR OUNDING
CONDUCTOR S
(NE C AR TICLE 810-21)
GR OUND CLAMPS
POWE R S E R VICE GR OUNDING
E LE CTR ODE S YS TE M
(NE C AR T 250, PAR T H)
GR OUND CLAMP
E LE CTR IC
S E R VICE
E QUIPME NT
NE C NATIONAL E LE CTR ICAL CODE
E XAMPLE OF ANTE NNA GR OUNDING
1
Television Overview
Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Special Features of Your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
TV Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TV Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
CableCARD Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
12 Chapter 1. Television Overview
Package Contents
Pleasetakeamomenttoreviewthefollowinglistofitemstoensure
thatyouhavereceivedeverything.
1
1. Remote Control
2. Two AA Batteries
3. Two-Ended IR Emitter
4. Owners Guide
5. Quick Reference Guide
6. TV Guide On Screen Interactive
Program Guide Users Manual
7. Product Registration Card
Special Features of Your TV
Yournewhigh-definitionwidescreentelevisionhasmany
specialfeaturesthatmakeittheperfectcenterofyour
homeentertainmentsystem,including:
High Definition DLP Display System
YourwidescreenMitsubishiHDTVusesTexasInstruments
mostadvancedDigitalLightProcessingtechnology
forrear-projectiontelevisions.ThisTVistrulyahigh-
performancemultimediamonitoruniquelycapableofboth
stunninghigh-definitionvideoimagesandclear,detailed,
high-resolutionimagesfromapersonalcomputer.
16:9 Widescreen Picture Format
Enjoyafulltheatricalexperienceinthecomfortofyour
home.Viewpicturesasfilmdirectorsintendedthem.
DigitalTVbroadcasts,DVDsandnewervideogamecon-
solessupportthiswidescreenformat.
Integrated HDTV Tuner
YourwidescreenMitsubishiHDTVhasaninternalHDTV
tunerabletoreceivebothover-the-airHDTVbroadcasts
(receivedviaanantenna)andnon-scrambleddigitalcable
broadcasts,includingnon-scrambledHDTVcablepro-
gramming.
High-Definition Video Inputs
Component Video Inputs,twoonmodelsWD-Y57
andWD-Y65;threeonmodelsWD-57732,WD-65732,
andWD-73732.AlsocalledY/Pb/Prinputs,these
inputsreceivestandardanalogvideoformatsof480i,
480p,720p,and1080ihigh-definitionsignals.This
providesahighlevelofflexibilitywhenconnecting
DVDplayers/recorders,cableboxes,andsatellite
receivers.
Two HDMI Inputsthatacceptdigital480i,480p,
720p,1080i,and1080pvideosignalsplusPCMdigital
stereosignals.Usedwithanadapter,theseinputs
alsoacceptcompatibleDVIvideosignals.HDMI
inputsprovideadditionalhigh-performance,high-
definitionconnectionsformaximumflexibilityinyour
choiceofhometheaterproducts.TheHDMIinputsare
HDCPcopy-protectioncompatible.
Two IEEE 1394 Digital Interfaces thatreceiveand
sendcompresseddigitalsignals,includinghigh-
definitionsignals,alongwithdigitalaudioandcontrol
signalsbetweendevicessuchastheTV,digitalcable
boxes,andD-VHSdigitalvideorecorders.
ClearThought Easy Connect Auto Input
Sensing
ClearThoughtautomaticallyrecognizeswhenyouplugin
aninputandpromptsyoutoassignanametoit.TheTV
ignoresanyunusedinputs,sotheresultisanuncluttered
InputSelectionmenuwhereyoucaneasilyfindandselect
connecteddevicesbyname.
Digital Cable Ready (CableCARD)
YourwidescreenMitsubishiHDTVisPlug-and-Play
digitalcableready.Itcandescrambleacableproviders
3
AA
AA 2
Chapter 1. Television Overview 13
one-waydigitalsignalswiththeuseofaCableCARD
securitymodule.TheCableCARDisusedinplaceofa
traditionalcableboxtoaccessdigitalcableprogramming
(includinghighdefinition).Contactyourlocalcablepro-
viderforavailabilityinformationandservicedetails.
NetCommand
Home Network Control

System
YourwidescreenMitsubishiHDTVoffersanewlevel
ofnetworkingthatcanseamlesslyintegrateselected
olderA/Vproductswithnewandfuturedigitalproducts.
NetCommandsupportsIEEE1394connections,Audio
VideoControlsystem(AV/C),5Ccopyprotection,and
IR(infrared)controlofselectedolderproducts,suchas
VCRs,DVDplayers,cableboxes,andsatellitereceivers.
NetCommandcanlearnremotecontrolsignalsdirectly
frommanydevices,allowingyoutocreateacustomized
NetCommand-controlledhome-theatersystem.
Memory Card Reader
(models WD-57732, WD-65732, WD-73732)
YoucandisplayaslideshowofyourfavoriteJPEGpic-
turesorlistentoMP3orWMAaudioselectionsrecorded
oncompatiblememorycards.
DVI-I Input for Computer Video
ConnectyourpersonalcomputersHDMIorDVIvideo
outputtothisjacktodisplaycomputerimagesontheTV.
TV Guide On Screen Interactive Program
Guide System
Aneight-dayon-screenprogramguideforcable,over-
the-air,andCableCARDreception.Thissubscription-
freeguidesystemlistsregular,digital,andhigh-definition
programming.Notethatwhenthesystemisfirstsetup,it
maytakeupto24hourstobegintoreceiveTVprogram
listingsandthenitmaytakeuptooneweektoreceiveall
eightdaysofTVprogramlistings.
Lift cover to use features on
the front panel.
TV Front Panel
A/V Reset
IfyouwishtoresettheA/V(Audio/Video)settingsbackto
thefactorydefaults:
Toresetallsettingsatonce,pressGUIDEandFORMATon
thefrontpanelatthesametime.
Toresetthedefaultsforindividualdevices,usethe
A/V Memory ResetselectionontheAudio/Video
menu.
Front Panel Controls and Indicators
1. Shadedbuttonsareduplicatesof
keysontheremotecontrol
2. POWER/TIMERindicatorlit
duringnormaloperation;flashing
whenauto-onTVTimerisset
3. LAMPindicatorshowslampcondi-
tion(usuallyoffduringnormalTV
operation)
4. STATUSindicator(offduring
normalTVoperation)
5. SYSTEM RESET(seedescription
thispage)
Control Panel
Theshadedbuttonsonthefrontcontrolpanelduplicate
keysontheremotecontrol.Theupperlabelsshowcontrol
functionswhennoTVmenusaredisplayed;thelower
labelsindicatefunctionswhenTVmenusaredisplayedor
whenaspecialfunctionhasbeenactivated.SeeRemote
ControlOverviewinchapter4,TVOperationandFea-
tures,forfurtherdetailsonthefunctionsofthesebuttons.
System Reset Button
IftheTVdoesnotrespondtothe
remotecontrol,frontpanelcontrols,
orwillnotpoweron/off,pressthe
SYSTEM RESETbuttononthefrontpanel
withapointedobject,suchasthepoint
ofapencilorendtipofapaperclip.
ThegreenLEDwillflashquicklyfor
aboutoneminute.WhenthegreenLEDstopsflashing,
youmayturnontheTV.Thechangesyoumademost
recently,beforeusingSYSTEM RESET,maybelost.
4:45&.
3&4&5
1
5
Right: INPUT 3
and controls on
front panel
Input 3
INPUT 3providesaneasilyaccessiblesetofstandard
audio/videojacks.Thesejacksallowforconvenientcon-
nectionofacamcorderorotheraudio/videodevice.Note
thatifyouconnecttotheS-VIDEOjack,theVIDEOjack
isdeactivated.
2 3 4 1
Memory Card Reader
(models WD-57732, WD-65732, WD-73732)
Thememorycardreaderhasfourcardslotsthataccepta
varietyofpopularmemorycardtypes.Thereaderletsyou
viewJPEGpicturesfrommanydigitalcamerasandallows
youtolistentoMP3orWMAaudiofilesrecordedfrom
computersorotherdigitalrecordingdevices.
Thecardslotsaredesignedforthespecifictypesof
cardslistedbelow.Othercardsorobjectsshouldnotbe
insertedintotheslotsasthismaydamagetheTV.Seethe
discussionofmemorycardsinchapter4TVOperation
andFeaturesfordetailsaboutJPEG,MP3andWMAfile
typesthatarecompatiblewiththeTV.
Card Compatibility
A. CARD 1 SmartMedia
B. CARD 2
MultiMediaCard
SecureDigital(SD)
C. CARD 3
CompactFlash(TypesIandII)
Microdrive
D. CARD 4
MemoryStickPRO
MemoryStick
CARD 1 SmartMedia
TM
CARD 3 CompactFlash
MicroDrive
CARD 4 PRO
TM
CARD 2 Multimedia Card
TM
SD Card
A
D
B
C
Front-Panel Indicators
POWER/TIMER Indicator
LED Color TV Condition Additional Information
None
TVispoweredoff.
Normaloperation.
Green
TVispoweredon.
Normaloperation.
Green
1. TVjustpluggedintoACoutlet.
Waituntilblinkingstopsbeforeturningon(approximately1
minute).Normaloperation.
2. ACjustrestoredafterpower
failure.
3. TVRebootingafterSystem
Resetused.
4. TVRebootingafterpower
fluctuationorreceivingabnor-
maldigitalsignalsfromdigital
channel,CableCARD,or
digitaldevice.
5. Youhavebeguntheprocedure
toupdatesoftwarefroman
authorizedflashmemorydevice.
Fordetailedinformation,seetheinstructionsthataccompanythe
authorizedsoftwareupdate.Important:Donotuseunauthorized
softwareatanytime.
Green
TVpoweredoffandauto-ontimer
isset.
Normaloperation.TVcanbeturnedonatanytime.
STATUS Indicator
None
NormalTVonorstandbycondition.
Normaloperation.
Yellow
Roomtemperatureistoohigh.
TVwillnotoperatewhentheambientroomtemperatureistoo
high.TurnofftheTVandwaituntiltheroomtemperaturedrops.
Red

TVmayrequireservice. TurnofftheTVandunplugthesetfromtheACpowersource.
Waitoneminuteandthenplugthesetbackin.
IftheLEDisstillon,contactyourdealeroraMitsubishi
AuthorizedServiceCenter.Seewww.mitsubishi-tv.comorcall
1-800-332-2119toreceiveAuthorizedServiceCenterinformation.
LAMP Indicator
None
NormalTVonorstandbycondition. Normaloperation.
Green
TVjustpoweredoffandlampis
cooling.
Startstoblink30secondsafterturningoffTV.TVcanbeturned
onbeforeblinkingstartsorafterblinkingstops,butnotwhilethe
indicatorisblinking.Normaloperation.
Yellow
1. Lampaccessdoorisopenor
notsecure.
TVwillnotoperateuntillampaccessdoorissecure.SeeAppen-
dixCforinstallationinformation.
2. Nolampinstalled.
TVwillnotoperatewithoutalamp.SeeAppendixCforinstallation
information.
Red
Lampnolongerilluminatesandhas
reachedtheendofthelamplife.
Replacethelamp.TheTVwillnotoperatewhenthelampno
longerilluminates.SeeAppendixCforinstallationinformation.
Off SteadyOn SlowBlinking FastBlinking
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
ANT 1/ MAlN ANT 2 / AUX
lEEE 1394
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
CableCARDUSEWlTH ANT 1 CARD TOP
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

COMPONENT COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
Dvl-l PC COMPATlBlLlTY
REFER TO OWNERS GUlDE.
2
TM
R
4&37*$&
1035
TV Back Panel
1. ANT 1/MAIN, ANT 2/AUX (Antenna)
Ifyouareconnectinganantenna,directcablewithout
acablebox,orareusingcablewithaCableCARD,
connectthemainantennaorcablesourceto
ANT 1/MAIN.
ANT 1/MAINandANT 2/AUXcaneachreceiveboth
digitalandanalogover-the-airchannelsfromaVHF/UHF
antennaornon-scrambleddigital/analogcablesource.
ANT 1/MAIN and CableCARD
UseANT 1/MAINtoreceivepremiumsubscriptioncable
TVserviceauthorizedbytheCableCARDaccesscard.
TheCableCARDaccesscardisprovidedbyyourlocal
cablecompany.ANT 2/AUXcancontinuetoreceive
over-the-airornon-scrambledcablesignalswhenANT 1
isusedforCableCARDservice.
2. CableCARD Slot
TheCableCARDaccesscardfromyourcableTVservice
providerisinsertedintothisslot.Wheninserting,ensure
thatthetopofthecardfacesinthedirectionindicatedby
CARD TOP .
IfyourcablecompanyisnotcurrentlyofferingCableCARD
accesscards,usethecableboxprovidedandauthorizedby
yourlocalcablecompanytoviewscrambledchannels.
3. INPUT 1 and 2 Inputs
(Audio and Video)
INPUT 1and2canbeusedtoconnectaVCR,Super
VHS(S-VHS)VCR,DVDplayer,standardsatellitereceiver,
orotherA/VdevicetotheTV.INPUT 3isathirdset
ofjackslocatedonornearthefrontoftheTVforconve-
nience.PleasenotethatifS-VIDEOandVIDEOare
bothavailable,youmustchoosetoconnectonlyone.
1
9
3 6 4 10
12 5 8
11
2
7
COMPONENT inputs 1 and 2 offered on models
WD-Y57 and WD-Y65.
COMPONENT inputs 1, 2, and 3 offered on
models WD-57732, WD-65732, and WD-73732.
13
4. COMPONENT Inputs
(COMPONENT 1 and 2 on WD-Y57, WD-Y65;
COMPONENT 13 on WD-57732, WD-65732,
WD-73732)
(Audio and Video)
Y Pb Pr (480i/480p/720p/1080i)
Usethesejackstoconnectdeviceswithcomponentvideo
outputs,suchasDVDplayers,externalHDTVreceivers,or
compatiblevideogamesystems.PleaseseeAppendixB
forsignalcompatibility.
5. HDMI 1 and 2
TheHDMI(HighDefinitionMultimediaInterface)supports
uncompressedstandardandhigh-definitiondigitalvideo
formatsandPCMdigitalaudioformat.ForPCvideo,use
thePC-DVIinputinstead.
Do not connect a computer to either TV HDMI jack.
UsetheseinputstoconnecttoEIA/CEA-861compliant
devicessuchasahigh-definitionreceiverorDVDplayer.
Theseinputssupport480i,480p,720p,1080i,and1080p
videoformats.
TheseinputscanalsoacceptDVIvideoinputs.Toconnect
aDVIinput,useanHDMI-to-DVIadapterorcableplus
analogaudiocables.Connecttheanalogaudiocablesto
theHDMI/DVI AUDIOinputsontheTVtoreceiveleft
andrightstereoaudiofromyourDVIdevice.
TheseinputsareHDCP(High-BandwidthDigitalCopyPro-
tection)compliant.
Theseinputsare certifiedforproperinteroper-
abilitywithotherproductscertifiedbySimplay.
6. HDMI/DVI AUDIO
UsetheseanalogaudioinputswhenconnectingDVI
videodevicestotheTVsHDMIjacks.UnlikeHDMI,
DVIdoesnotcarryaudioinformationonthesamecable.
For analog audio from a personal computer, use the
PC-DVI AUDIO jacks instead.
7. PC-DVI
PC-DVIisaDVI-IinputcompatiblewithbothDVI-A
(analog)andDVI-D(digital)inputs.Connectyourpersonal
computersHDMI,DVI,orVGAvideooutputtothisjack.An
adapterorconvertercablemayberequired.Pleasesee
AppendixBforsignalcompatibility.Tohearaudiofrom
thecomputer,connectanalogaudiocablesfromthecom-
putertothePC-DVI AUDIOjacks.
8. PC-DVI AUDIO
UsethePC-DVI AUDIOjacksinconjunctionwiththe
PC-DVIvideoinputfromapersonalcomputer.These
jacksallowyoutosendleftandrightanalogaudiofrom
yourcomputertotheTV.
9. IEEE 1394/DTVLINK
ThesejacksallowtheTVtoconnecttoexternalIEEE1394
digitalproductsbymeansofasinglecable.Seechapter
6,NetCommandOperationsfordetailedinformation
regardingIEEE1394connectionsandrecording.
10. MONITOR OUT
Usethesecompositevideoandleft/rightaudiojacks
tosendanalogvideoandaudiosignalstoanexternal
recordingdevicesuchasaVCR.To make recordings
from this output, the TV must be in normal full-screen
mode rather than in Split Screen mode.
Youcanwatchanotherdevicewhilerecording,but
notanotherchannel.
Fromthisoutputyoucanrecordaudioandvideo
signalsfromANT 1, ANT 2, INPUT 1-3,and
IEEE1394devices.
DigitalsignalsfromANT 1, ANT 2,andIEEE
1394devicesareconvertedtoanalogvideoand
audiosignals.
Somesignalscannotberecordedbecauseof
copy-protectionflagsinthecontent.
11. AUDIO OUT LEFT/RIGHT
AUDIO OUT LEFT/RIGHTjackssendanalogaudioof
theprogramcurrentlyshownonthescreentoanA/Vsur-
roundsoundreceiverorstereosystem.Digitalaudiofrom
digitalchannels,FireWire(IEEE1394/DTVLink)devices
andHDMIdevicesisconvertedtoanalogaudiobytheTV.
IfusingananalogA/Vreceiverorstereosystem,thisis
theonlyaudioconnectionneededbetweenitandtheTV.
12. DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
ThisoutputsendsDolbyDigitalorPCMdigitalaudiotoyour
digitalA/Vsurroundsoundreceiver.Analogaudiofrom
analogchannelsanddevicesisconvertedbytheTVto
PCMdigitalaudio.IfyouhaveadigitalA/Vreceiver,inmost
casesthisistheonlyaudioconnectionneededbetweenthe
TVandyourA/Vreceiver.
13. IR Emitter NetCommand
IREmittersconnectedtothisjackareusedbytheTVs
NetCommandsystemtocontrolexternalIRremotecon-
trolledanalogdevicessuchascableboxes,VCRs,DVDs,
satellitereceiversandaudioreceivers.Thissystemalso
coordinateswiththeTVGuideOnScreensystemto
controlcableboxesandtoactivatetherecordfeatureof
yourVCR.
TV Back Panel, continued
CableCARD Technology
CableCARDisanationwidesystemstandardthatallows
yourlocalcableTVprovidertosupplyyouwithanaccess
cardcustomizedtoyouraccount.Thiscardallowsyour
TVtoreceive,decode,andunscramblethepremium
digitalchannelsincludedinyourcableTVsubscription
withouttheuseofacablebox.Whenyoumovetoanew
cableprovidersarea,returntheCableCARDtotheoriginal
cableproviderandgetanewcardfromyournewprovider.
PleasenotethatCableCARDisarelativelynewtechnology
andyourlocalcableprovidermaynotcurrentlybeoffer-
ingthisservice.Astimepasses,thissystemwillbecome
broadlysupportedbymostcableproviders.
TheCableCARDsystemisunidirectional,meaningyour
cableprovidercansendupdatestotheTV,buttheTV
cannotsendsignalsback.Asaresult,certainadvanced
andinteractivedigitalcableservices,suchasrequestsfor
video-on-demandandpay-per-viewprograms,acable
operatorsenhancedprogramguide,anddata-enhanced
televisionservicesmayrequireuseofaset-topbox
instead.Formoreinformation,callyourlocalcableopera-
tor.
DigitalcablechannelsauthorizedbytheCableCARDare
availableontheFirewireIEEE1394networkandcanbe
sharedbyotherproductsonthenetwork.Youmaybe
unabletorecordorcopysomedigitalprograms,however,
becauseofcopyrestrictionssetbythecontentorcopy-
rightowners.
Using a CableCARD
PowerontheTVandinserttheCableCARDintothe
CableCARDslotwiththetopofthecardorientedasindi-
catedbyCARD TOP .Whentheinitialscreendis-
plays,writedowntheinformationthatappearsandhaveit
readywhencallingyourcableprovider.
In order to start cable
service for this device, please contact
your cable provider
1-800-xxx-xxxx
CableCARD(tm): xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx-x
Host: xxx-xxx-xxx-xxx-x
Data: xxx-xxx-xxx-xx
UnitAddress: xx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxx
Press EXIT to exit.
Sample CableCARD initial screen. Record the information
before contacting your cable provider.
Toreviewtheinformationlater,pressMENUandwhenthe
Mainmenuappears,press9 9 9tore-displaythescreen.
Note: CableCARDrequirestheTVsFast Power On
setting.IfyouinsertaCableCARD,theTVwill
automaticallyoverrideaLow Powersettingand
changetotheFast Power Onsetting.
IMPORTANT
To use a CableCARD, connect the primary
incoming cable to ANT 1/MAIN on the TV.
CableCARD Menu
Press ENTER to select an application. Press EXIT key to exit.
CableCARD menu
Network Setup
CableCARD(tm) Status
CableCARD(tm) Pairing
Conditional Access
Sample CableCARD menu
TodisplaytheCableCARDmenuwithlinkstoapplications
fromyourcableprovider:
1. WhilewatchingCableCARD,pressINPUTtoopenthe
InputSelectionmenu.
2. WiththeCableCARDiconhighlighted,pressMENUto
opentheCableCARDmenu.
3. Press tohighlightalink(bluetext),thenpress
ENTERtoaccessthelinkedpage.
4. ToredisplaytheCableCARDmenu,repeatsteps1and
2.
5. PressEXITtoreturntoTVviewing.
IftherearetechnicalproblemswiththeCableCARD,an
errorscreenautomaticallydisplayswithinformationthat
maybeneededbyyourcableproviderwhenyoucallthem
forassistance.
Moving Through Other CableCARD Screens
InadditiontoCableCARDmenus,otherCableCARD
applicationscreensmaydisplayandrequireyoutomake
additionalselections.Whenusingthesescreensonyour
Mitsubishitelevision:
Bluetextdenotesalinktoanotherscreen.PressENTER
tomovetothenextapplication.Screenswithoutblue
textcontainnolinks.
Youcannotmovebackwardthroughthelinks.Toexit
theCableCARDsystem,pressEXIT.TheCANCELkeymay
notworkwithsomeCableCARDscreens.
Allinformationontheseapplicationscreensisprovidedby
yourlocalcablecompany.Contactyourcableproviderif
youhaveanyproblemswiththeapplicationscreendisplays.
IMPORTANT
Most CableCARD screens show only status or
diagnostic information and do not allow you
to make changes. These screens are mean-
ingful only to your local cable provider.
2
TV Connections
Connection Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Digital Video and Home Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
HDTV Cable Box or Satellite Receiver with Component Video . . . . 21
Standard Cable Box, Satellite Receiver, or Other Device with
S-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Wall Outlet Cable (no cable box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Antenna with a Single Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Antennas with Separate UHF and VHF Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
VCR to a Cable Box (Audio & Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
HDMI Device (Cable Box, Satellite Receiver, DVD Player, or
Other Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
DVI Video Device (Cable Box, Satellite Receiver, DVD Player,
or Other Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
DVD Player with Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
A/V Receiver (Sound System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Older Cable Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
IEEE 1394 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
IR Emitter NetCommand and TV Guide On Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Helpful Hints for NetCommand Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
20 Chapter 2. TV Connections
Connection Types
Video and Combined Audio/Video Connections
ThesedescriptionsapplytoTVvideoonlyanddonotcoversignalsfrompersonalcomputers.
Picture Quality
(most sources)
Name Signal Type
Figures
(not to scale)
Additional Information
Best
(carryhigh-
definitionvideo
whenavailable)
HDMI
Digitalaudio
andvideo

Carriesdigitalaudioand
uncompresseddigitalvideoon
asingleone-waycable.
DVI Digitalvideo
Carriesuncompresseddigital
videoaloneonasingleone-way
cable;requiresseparateaudio
connections.
ComponentVideo Analogvideo
YPbPrRCA-styleconnectors
arecoloredgreen,blue,andred.
Carriesanaloghigh-definition
andstandard-definitionsignals.
Good S-Video Analogvideo
Carriesanalogstandard-defi-
nitionsignals.Providesbetter
qualityvideothancompositeor
RFcoaxialvideo.
Fair CompositeVideo Analogvideo

RCA-styleconnector,usually
coloredyellow.Carriesanalog
standard-definitionsignals.
FairtoBest
(dependingon
source;carry
allqualitiesof
signals)
IEEE1394
(FireWire)
Digitalaudio
andvideo
Carriescompresseddigital
videoandaudioaswellas
devicecontrolsignalsona
singletwo-waycable.
RFCoaxialVideo
Analogand
digitalaudio
andvideo
Carriesaudioandvideoona
singlecable.
Note: OnlysomeTVsignalsarehigh-defnitionsignals.Toview
high-defnitionprogrammingfromyourcableorsatellite
provider,youmustsubscribetotheprovidershigh-defnition
service.Someover-the-airbroadcastsareinhigh-defnition
andcanbereceivedwithahigh-qualityantennasuitedto
yourlocation.
Audio Connections
TherearetwotypesofaudioconnectionsusedonthisTV.Refertothetablebelow.
Audio Connection
Figures
(not to scale)
Additional Information
Left/RightAnalog
StereoAudio
RCA-styleconnectorsusuallycoloredwhiteforleftand
redforrightstereoaudio.Formonauralsound(allspeak-
ersplayingthesamesound),useonlythewhiteconnector.
DigitalAudio(Coaxial)
RCA-styleconnectorusuallycoloredorange.Usetosend
digitalaudiofromtheTVtoyourdigitalA/Vreceiverfor
surround-soundeffects.Usuallytheonlyaudioconnec-
tionrequiredbetweentheTVandtheA/Vreceiver.
Chapter 2. TV Connections 21
Digital Video and Home Recording
Thetablebelowwillhelpyoudecidewhichtypeofconnectiontousefordigitalvideo.Digitalvideocomestoyour
homeinacompressedstate,whetherreceivedonrecordedmedia(e.g.,disc)orbroadcastovertheair,overcable,or
viasatellite.Somecompresseddigitalvideoisavailableforrecordingasnotedinthetable.
Connection Type into the TV Effect on Home Recording
HDMI or DVI
Compressedvideoisconvertedto
uncompressedformbyanexternaldevice
suchasacablebox,satellitereceiver,or
DVDplayerbeforeitissenttotheTVonan
HDMIorDVIcable.
YoucannotrecordtheresultantuncompressedvideosenttotheTV
viaHDMIorDVI.
IEEE 1394 (FireWire) Connections
YourTVcanreceiveanddecodedigital
channels,MPEG2compresseddigitalvideo,
andDolbyDigitalaudio.
Youcanrecordcompresseddigitalvideoeither
oncompatibledigitalrecordersasdigitalsignalsusingIEEE1394
connections
convertedtoanalogsignalsandrecordedasstandard-definition
compositevideofromtheMONITOR OUTjack
Youmaybeunabletorecordsomeprogrammingbecauseofcopyrestric-
tionsaddedbythecontentowners.
HDTV Cable Box or Satellite
Receiver with Component Video
IfyourcableboxorsatellitereceiverhasHDMIorDVI
outputs,usetheconnectionsforHDMIorDVIvideo
devicesdescribedlaterinthischapter.
Required:RCAcomponentvideocables,left/rightanalog
audiocables.
Acoaxialsplitter,availableatmostelectronicsupply
stores,mayberequiredtocompletethisinstallation.
1. Connectthecablefromtheoutsidecableorsatel-
liteservicetoCABLE INorSATELLITE INon
thecableboxorsatellitereceiver.Seeyourdevices
ownersguideforinstructionsandcablecompatibility.
2. ConnectRCA-typecablesfromtheYPbProutputs
ontheHDTVcableboxorsatellitereceivertoCOM-
PONENTontheTVbackpanel,matchingthe
coloredconnections.
3. Connectleft(white)andright(red)audiocablesfrom
theHDTVcableboxorsatellitereceivertoCOMPO-
NENT /AUDIO LEFTandAUDIO RIGHTonthe
TVbackpanel.
4. Optional:ToallowuseoftheSplitScreenfeaturewith
channelsfromANT 1andthecableboxorsatellite
receiver,connecttheincomingterrestrialantennaor
cableservice(notsatellite)toANT 1/MAINonthe
TVbackpanel.Acoaxialsplitter,availableatmost
electronicssupplystores,mayberequiredtocom-
pletethisinstallation.
Note: Toreceivethebeneftsofdigitalsurroundsound,con-
nectthedigitalaudiooutputfromyourcableboxor
satellitereceiverdirectlytoyourdigitalA/Vreceiver.
Y
Pr
Pb
AUDIO
L
R
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394 DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
CableCARDUSEWlTH ANT 1 CARDTOP
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
ANT 1/ MAlN
1.
4.
2.
2.
3.
3.
CABLE IN or
SATELLITE IN
Incom|ng
Antenna or
Cab|e
Incom|ng
Antenna or
Cab|e
Figure 1. Connecting an external HDTV receiver with
component video connections
Standard Cable Box, Satellite
Receiver, or Other Device with
S-Video
Required:S-Videocableandleft/rightanalogstereo
audiocables.
1. Connectthecablefromtheoutsidecableorsatellite
servicetoCABLE INorSATELLITE INonthe
cableboxorsatellitereceiver.
2. ConnectanS-VideocablefromVIDEO OUTonthe
cableboxorsatellitereceiverbackpaneltoINPUT
S-VIDEOontheTVbackpanel.
AUDIO OUTonthecableboxorsatellitereceiverto
INPUT/AUDIO LEFTandAUDIO RIGHTonthe
TVbackpanel.
Note: RefertothecableboxorsatellitereceiverOwners
Guideforcableordishantennaconnectionstothe
receiver.
3.
2.
2.
AUDlO OUT
vlDEO OUT
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394 DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
CABLE IN or
SATELLITE IN
3.
1.
Any S-V|deo Dev|ce
TV Back Pane|
Incom|ng
Cab|e from
Wa||
Figure 2. Connecting a device with S-Video
Wall Outlet Cable (no cable box)
(can be used with a CableCARD)
Itisveryimportanttoconnecttheincomingcableforyour
primaryviewingsourcetoANT 1/MAIN,especiallyfor
CableCARDuse.
1. Connecttheprimaryincomingcoaxialleadcableto
ANT 1/MAINontheTVbackpanel.
2. Foranoptionalsecondaryantennasource,connect
anantenna(orcable)toANT 2/AUX.
3. IfyouhavesubscribedtoaCableCARDservice,
InserttheCableCARDintotheCableCARDslot.The
topofthecardmustfaceinthedirectionindicatedby
theCARD TOParrow.
Seechapter1,TelevisionOverview,foradditional
CableCARDinformation.DetailedTVGuideOnScreen
informationisintheseparateUsersManual.
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
USE WlTH
CableCARD
Figure 3. Wall Outlet Cable
Antennas with Separate UHF and
VHF Leads
Required:UHF/VHFcombiner
ThisisnotincludedwiththeTV,butisavailableatmost
electronicsstores.
1. ConnecttheUHFandVHFantennaleadstotheUHF/
VHFcombiner.
2. PushthecombinerontoANT 1/MAINontheTV
backpanel.
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
ANT 1/ MAlN
USE WlTH
CableCARD
Externa|
Antenna
or Cab|e
Back
V|ew
S|de
V|ew
UHF Antenna
(Channe|s 14-69|
VHF Antenna
(Channe|s 2-13|
300-Ohm-to-
75-Ohm
Comb|ner
F|at Tw|n Lead
UHF
vHF
1.
2.
To ANT 1/MAIN
TV back pane|
Figure 5. Connecting separate UHF and VHF Antennas
Mitsubishi strongly recommends you avoid using
antennas with flat twin leads. Flat twin lead
antenna wires are subject to interference which
may adversely affect the performance of the TV.
We recommend using coaxial antenna cable.
Antenna with a Single Lead
A. For an antenna with flat twin leads
A300-ohm-to-75-ohmtransformerisrequired.Thisisnot
includedwiththeTV,butisavailableatmostelectronics
stores.
A1. Foranantennawithflattwinleads,connectthe
300-ohmtwinleadstothe300-ohm-to-75-ohmtrans-
former.
A2.Pushthe75-ohmsideofthetransformerontoANT 1
ontheTVbackpanel.
B. For cable or antenna with coaxial lead
ConnectthecoaxialleaddirectlytoANT 1ontheTV
backpanel.
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
ANT 1/ MAlN
USE WlTH
CableCARD
300-Ohm
F|atTw|n
Lead
Opt|ona| 300-Ohm-
to-75-Ohm
Match|ng Transformer
75-Ohm
Coax|a|
Cab|e
B.
A2.
A1.
TV Back
Pane|
Figure 4. Connecting a Single Antenna
VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet
Cable
Required:Two-wayRFsplitter,3coaxialcables,rightand
leftanalogaudiocables,eitherS-videoorvideocable.
ThesearenotincludedwiththeTVbutareavailableat
mostelectronicsstores.
1. ConnecttheincomingcableorantennatoINonthe
RFsplitter.
2. ConnectonecoaxialcablefromOUTontheRFsplit-
tertoANTENNA INontheVCRbackpanel.
3. ConnectonecoaxialcablefromOUTontheRF
splittertoANT 1/MAINontheTVbackpanel.This
connectionalsoallowsyoutousetheTVGuideOn
ScreenandSplitScreenfeatures.
4. TousetheTVspeakerswiththeVCR,connectleft
(white)andright(red)audiocablesfromAUDIO
OUTontheVCRtoINPUT/AUDIO LEFTand
AUDIO RIGHTontheTVbackpanel.IfyourVCRis
mono(non-stereo),connectonlythewhite(left)cable.
Figure 6. Connecting a VCR to an Antenna or Wall Outlet Cable
5. ConnecteitheranS-Videoorcompositevideo
cablefromVIDEO OUTontheVCRbackpanelto
INPUT/VIDEOorS-VIDEOontheTVbackpanel.
Connectonlyonetypeofvideocable;S-Videois
recommended,ifavailable.
Optional
TousetheTVGuideOnScreenrecordingfeatureand
torecordhigh-definitiondigitalchannelsconvertedto
analogstandard-definitionvideoandanalogstereo
audio,performthesetwoadditionalsteps.
AUDIO INontheVCRtoMONITOR OUT LEFT/
RIGHTontheTVbackpanel.IfyourVCRismono
(non-stereo),connectonlythewhite(left)cable.
7. ConnectacompositevideocablefromVIDEO
INontheVCRbackpaneltoMONITOR OUT/
VIDEOontheTVbackpanel.
ANTENNA
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
lN
lN
lN
lN
R R
L L/MONO
AUDIO
VIDEO S-VIDEO
ANTENNA
lN OUT lN
R
L
AUDIO
OUT lN
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
4.
4.
IN
O
U
T
O
U
T
T
W
O
W
A
Y
S
P
L
IT
T
E
R
5.
5.
5.
VCR to a Cable Box (Audio & Video)
Required:Two-wayRFsplitter,4coaxialcables,rightand
leftaudiocables,S-Videoorcompositevideocable,plus
componentorS-Videocablesandaudiocablesrequired
toconnecttheTVtothecablebox.
1. ConnecttheincomingcabletoINontheRFsplitter.
tertoCABLE INonthecablebox.
3. ConnectonecoaxialcablefromOUTontheRF
splittertoANT 1/MAINontheTVbackpanel.This
connectionalsoallowsyoutousetheTVGuideOn
ScreenandSplitScreenfeatures.
4. ConnectonecoaxialcablefromOUTonthecable
boxtoANTENNA INontheVCRbackpanel.
5. ConnectthecableboxoutputstotheTVasshown
inoneoftheoptionslistedbelow.Thisconnection
allowstheTVtoreceivethebestavailablesignal
directlyfromthecablebox.
Figure 1:ComponentvideooutputtotheTVs
COMPONENT Y Pb Prjacks;analogstereo
audiototheassociatedAUDIOjacks.
OR
Figure 2:S-VideooutputtotheTVs
INPUT/S-VIDEOjack;analogstereoaudioto
theassociatedAUDIOjacks.
Figure 7. Connecting a VCR to a cable box
ANTENNA
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
lN
lN
lN
lN
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO S-VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
lN
lN
lN
R
L L
AUDIO
VIDEO S-VIDEO
R
CABLE
OUT lN
Y
Pb
Pr
R
L
AUDlO
S-vlDEO
CABLE
OUT lN
Y
Pb
Pr
R
L
AUDlO
S-vlDEO
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394 DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
ANT 1/ MAlN USE WlTH
CableCARD
4.
4.
IN
O
U
T
O
U
T
T
W
O
W
A
Y
S
P
L
IT
T
E
R
6. TousetheTVspeakerswiththeVCR,connectleft
(white)andright(red)audiocablesfromAUDIO OUT
ontheVCRbackpaneltoINPUT/AUDIO LEFT
andAUDIO RIGHTontheTVbackpanel.Ifyour
VCRismono(non-stereo),connectonlythewhite(left)
cable.
7. ConnecteitheranS-Videoorcompositevideo
cablefromVIDEO OUTontheVCRbackpanelto
INPUT/VIDEOorINPUT/S-VIDEOontheTV
backpanel.Connectonlyonetypeofvideocable.
S-Videoisrecommended,ifavailable.
Optional
8. ToallowrecordingfromtheTVtotheVCR:
a. Connectleft(white)andright(red)audiocables
fromAUDIO INontheVCRbackpanelto
MONITOR OUT/LEFT andRIGHTontheTV
backpanel.
b. ConnectavideocablefromVIDEO INonthe
VCRbackpaneltoMONITOR OUT/VIDEOon
theTVbackpanel.
Note: Whenusingthisconnectionconfgurationwiththe
connectionsusedinstep5,itispossibletoview
livecableprogramsthroughtheVCRDevice.For
bestpicturequalityalwaysviewlivecablepro-
gramsdirectlyfromthecableboxdevice.
DVI Video Device (Cable Box,
Satellite Receiver, DVD Player, or
Other Device)
AnalogstereoaudiocablesandaDVI-to-HDMIcableor
DVI/HDMIadapterandHDMIcablearerequired.These
arenotincludedwiththeTV.Theymaybeavailableat
yourlocalelectronicsretailer.
1. ConnecttheDVI-to-HDMIcable(recommended)or
HDMIcablewithDVI/HDMIadapterfromtheDVI
devicesbackpaneltotheTVbackpanel.
NOTE: IfyouareusingaDVI/HDMIadapter,itisimpor-
tanttoconnecttheadaptertotheDVIdevicefor
bestperformance.
2. ConnectasetofaudiocablesfromAUDIO OUT
ontheDVIdevicebackpaneltotheHDMI/DVI
AUDIOontheTVbackpanel.Connectthered
cabletotheRIGHTjackandthewhitecabletothe
LEFTjack.
NOTE: TheHDMIconnectionsupportscopyprotection
(HDCP).
Somedevicesrequireconnectingtoananalog
inputfrst,inordertoviewon-screenmenusand
toselectDVIastheouput.Pleasereviewyour
equipmentinstructionsforDVIconnectivityand
compatibility.
R
L
AUDlO OUT
R
L
AUDlO OUT
Dvl OUT
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394 DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
HDMl 1
DVI Dev|ce
2.
1.
DVI-to-HDMI Cab|e
1.
TV Back Pane|
2.
Figure 9. Connecting a DVI device
HDMI Device (Cable Box, Satellite
Receiver, DVD Player, or Other Device)
Required:HDMI-to-HDMIcable.Thisisnotincluded
withtheTV.
ConnectanHDMIcablefromtheTVbackpaneltothe
HDMIdeviceoutput.HDMIdevicesprovidevideoand
audiothroughthiscable,sonootherconnectionis
required.TherearetwoHDMIinputsontheTVback
panel.
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394 DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
)%.*%FWJDF
57#BDL1BOFM
Figure 8. Connecting an HDMI device.
Note: HDMIinputsare certifedforproper
interoperabilitywithotherproductscertifedby
Simplay.
IMPORTANT
To connect a personal computer to the TV,
see chapter 7, Using the TV with a Personal
Computer.
The HDMI input processes signals as standard
motion video and is not designed to process
computer resolutions.
IMPORTANT
For sound from your devices, note that the
HDMI inputs can receive digital stereo audio
signals only. To use digital surround sound for
an HDMI or DVI device, connect that devices
digital audio output directly to your A/V
receiver. See the Owners Guides for those
devices for instructions.
DVD Player with Component Video
Componentvideocablesandanalogaudiocablesare
required.ThesearenotincludedwiththeTV.
1. ConnectthecomponentvideocablesfromY PB
PR VIDEO OUTonthebackoftheDVDplayerto
theCOMPONENTjacksontheTVbackpanel,
matchingthered,green,andbluecoloredconnec-
tions.
2. Connectleft(white)andright(red)stereoaudio
cablesfromAUDIO OUTonthebackoftheDVD
playertoCOMPONENT/AUDIO LEFTand
RIGHTontheTVbackpanel.
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394 DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
2
COMPONENT
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
7*%&0065
"6%*0065
:
-
3
1C
1S 1S
1C
3
-
:
"6%*0065
Figure 10. Connecting a DVD player with component
video
IMPORTANT
See Appendix B for component video signal
compatibility information.
For digital audio connections to your A/V
receiver, see your DVD player and A/V
receiver Owners Guides.
A/V Receiver (Sound System)
Mostsetupsrequireeitheradigitalaudiocableoranalog
stereoaudiocables.
TheTVmakesallaudioavailableindigitalandanalog
formats.AnalogaudiocomingintotheTVisavailable
indigitalformatontheDIGITAL AUDIO OUTjack.
Digitalincomingaudioisavailableinanalogformatonthe
AUDIO OUT LEFT/RIGHTjacks.Usually,onlyoneof
thefollowingconnectionsisrequired:
ToconnectananalogA/Vreceiver
Connectleft(white)andright(red)audiocablesfrom
AUDIO OUT/LEFTandRIGHTontheTVback
paneltotheTV AUDIO INPUTontheA/Vreceiver.
ToconnectadigitalA/VreceiverwithDolby
Digital surround sound and PCM audio support
Connectoneendofthedigitalaudiocableto
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTonthebackoftheTV.
ConnecttheotherendtotheCOAXIAL DIGITAL
INPUTonthebackoftheA/Vreceiver.
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394 DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
AUDlO
OUT
DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
LEFT
RlGHT
Figure 11. Connecting audio from the TV to an A/V
receiver
Note:
Onrareoccasions,anHDMIsignalmaybe
copy-restrictedandcannotbeoutputfromtheTV
asadigitalsignal.Tohearthesecopy-protected
signalsthroughtheA/Vreceiver,useconnections
foranalogA/Vreceivers.
ChecktheA/VreceiversOwnersGuidefor
informationconcerninguseofthedigitalinput
andswitchingbetweendigitalsoundandanalog
stereosoundfromtheTV.
Older Cable Box
Required:3coaxialcables,onetwo-wayRFsplitter.
ThesearenotincludedwiththeTV.
Whenthissetupiscomplete,youcanusetheTVremote
control,whenprogrammed,tochangechannelsonthe
cablebox.
Note: Thisconnectionisnotrecommended.Theother
connectionsdescribedinthischapterprovidebet-
terqualityaudioandvideototheTV.
1. ConnecttheincomingcabletoINontheRFsplitter.
tertoANT 1/MAINontheTVbackpanel.
tertoINonthestandardcablebox.
4. ConnectonecoaxialcablefromOUTonthecable
boxtoANT 2/AUXontheTVbackpanel.
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394 DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
ANT 1/ MAlN ANT 2 / AUX USE WlTH
CableCARD
lN OUT lN OUT
IN
O
U
T
O
U
T
T
W
O
W
A
Y
S
P
L
IT
T
E
R
TV back pane|
Cab|e box
back pane|
RF Sp||tter
To ANT 1/MAIN To ANT 2/AUX
Incom|ng
Cab|e
3.
3. 4.
4.
1.
2.
2.
Figure 12. Connecting an older cable box
Camcorder
Required:Analogstereoaudiocablesandeitheran
S-Videoorcompositevideocable.
NOTE: ForIEEE1394camcorders,seealsolaterinthis
chapterunderIEEE1394Devices.
1. ConnecteitheranS-Videoorcompositevideocable
fromVIDEO OUTonthecamcordertoINPUT 3/
VIDEOorS-VIDEOontheTV.Connectonlyone
typeofvideocable;S-Videoisrecommended,ifavail-
able.
2. Connectleft(white)andright(red)audiocables
fromAUDIO OUTonthecamcordertoINPUT 3/
AUDIO LandAUDIO RontheTV.
Compos|te V|deo Cab|e
S-V|deo Cab|e
1.
1.
2.
2.
Figure 13. Analog connections for a camcorder
IEEE 1394 Devices
Compatible IEEE 1394 Devices
CompatibleA/Vdevicesincludesome,butnotall,cable
boxes,D-VHSVCRs,A/Vdiscs,andfutureproducts.
SomedevicesmayhaveIEEE1394connectorsbutarenot
compatiblewiththeTV.Areasofcompatibilitytoconsider
are:
1. Digital Video Signals
TheTVcandecodeMPEG2videoasprovidedbycable
boxesandsomecamcorders.Manycamcordersprovide
DVvideo,whichtheTVcannotdecode.ConnectaDV
camcordertotheTVusinganalogaudiopluscomposite
video,S-video,orcomponentvideo,oruseHDMIaudio/
video.Othertypesofdigitalvideo,suchasPCvideo
providedbysomecomputers,mustbedecodedbythe
sourcedeviceandsenttotheTVasanalogvideo,S-video,
orDVI/HDMIvideo.
2. Digital Audio Signals
Whenreceivedwithvideosignals,theTVcandecode
DolbyDigitalsignalsandMPEGaudiosignals.Other
typesofdigitalaudioasprovidedbysomedigitalrecord-
ingdevices,suchasMP3audioandDTSaudio,cannotbe
decodedbytheTVwhenreceivedoverIEEE1394con-
nections.
TheTVmaynotbeabletopassincompatibledigitalaudio
signalsonthecoaxialdigitalaudiooutput.Thesesignals
maypasstootherdevices,however,ontheIEEE1394cable.
3. Digital Control Signal
TheTVcanserveasthecontrolcenterforIEEE1394
audio/videodevices,suchasVCRs,A/VDiscs,tuners,
cableboxes,andamplifiersthatarecompatiblewiththe
followingIEEE1394controlstandards.
EIA-775. Designedfortuningdevicessuchascable
boxes,allowingthedevicetosendsimplegraph-
ics.Thisstandarddoesnot,however,allowtheTVto
controlthecableboxbyIEEE1394.
AV/C (Audio Video Control). Designedtoprovide
basiccontrolssuchasplay,stop,channelselection,
andvolume,asappropriateforthedevice.
Four-Pin and 6-Pin Connections
TherearetwodifferenttypesofconnectorsusedforIEEE
1394terminalsandcables:a4-pinanda6-pintype.Both
typessendthesamedigitalaudio,video,andcontrol
signals,butthe6-pinconnectorscanalsosupplylow-
voltageelectricalpowertoconnecteddevices.ThisTV
usesonly4-pintypeconnectors.
A6-pinconnectorcannotbeconnecteddirectlytoa4-pin
jack,andviceversa.Toconnecta6-pindevicetoa4-pin
device,usea6-pin-to-4-pinadapteroradaptercable.
Thesecablesareavailablefromelectronicsandcomputer
stores.
4-pin connector 6-pin connector 6-pin-to-4-pin adapter
Ifyouwishtoconnecta6-pindevicetotheTV(suchasa
camcorder),andthedeviceisdesignedtoreceiveelectri-
calpowerfromanother6-pindevice,thereareseveral
waystoprovideelectricalpowertothedevice:
ConnectthecamcorderdirectlytothehouseholdAC.
Usethecamcordersbatteryforpower.
Connectthecamcorderdirectlytoanother6-pin
deviceinthenetworkthatcanprovidepower.
Connection Methods
TherearetwoconnectionmethodsforIEEE1394devices.Use
themethodthatfitsyournetworkofaudio/videoproducts.
Direct Device-To-Device Method
TheIEEE1394interfaceallowsyoutochaindevices,
unlikeaudioandvideoconnectionsthatrequireyouto
connecteachindividualdevicedirectlytotheTV.For
example,youcanconnectyourD-VHStoyour1394A/V
discandthenconnectthe1394A/VdisctotheTV.The
resultingIEEE1394chainallowsyoutoaddmoredevices
tothechain.Youwillseeaniconforeachdeviceinthe
TVsInputSelectionmenuandcanalsosendinformation
fromanyIEEE1394devicetoothercompatibledevices.
A/v Disc
Digital
vCR
Tv
Hub Connection Method
TheIEEE1394standardallowsyoutousetheTVasahub
withintheaudio/videonetwork.Eachdevicecansend
information,whichmayincludeaudioandvideo,toany
otherdeviceinthenetwork.
Tv 1394
Monitor
Digital
vCR #1
Digital
vCR #2
A/v
Disc #1
IEEE 1394 Devices, continued
Tips for Connecting IEEE 1394 Devices
Donotloopthelast
deviceinthechainback
totheTV.Whenthe
devicechainislooped,
theTVmaynotbeable
toworkwiththeother
devices.
Placedevicesthathaveonlyamechanical(two-
position)powerswitchattheendofthechainorleave
thepowerswitchintheonposition.Whenturnedoff,
IEEE1394signalsmaynotbeabletopassthroughthe
devicetootherdevices.
Placedeviceswiththeslowestcommunicationspeed
attheendofthechain.Sometimesthecommunica-
tionspeedismarkedneartheIEEE1394connector
withanSnumber.Thehigherthenumber,thefaster
thecommunicationspeed.ThisTVhasacommunica-
tionspeedofs400.Deviceswithslowcommunica-
tionspeedscaninterferewithIEEE1394signalsfrom
fasterdevices.Whensettingupadigitalrecording
betweenafasterdeviceandaslowerdevice,makethe
slowerdevicethesourceandmakethefasterdevice
therecorder.
UseIEEE1394cables15feetorlessinlength
betweendevices.
ThisTVisanIEEE1394adevice.Itcanbeusedwith
anIEEE1394bsystemwhenanIEEE-1394a-to-1394b
convertorisused.1394bsystemsarecapableof
greaterdistancesandmulti-roomapplications.
TheTVcanrecognizeamaximumofsevenIEEE1394
devicesatanyonetime.
%JHJUBM
%7%
%JHJUBM
7$3
57
IEEE 1394 Camcorders
Control Functions.Connectthecamcordertothe
TVsIEEE1394jackontherearoftheTVandtest
usingtheTVsremotecontroltooperatethecam-
corder.Ifyourmodeldoesnotoperateproperly,use
thecamcorderscontrolbuttonsinstead.
MPEG Camcorder.Ifyouareunabletoplayback
overtheIEEE1394interface,usetheanalogaudio/
videoconnectionsdescribedinchapter2,TVCon-
nections.
DV Camcorder.Connectthecamcorderusingthe
analogaudioandvideoconnectionsdescribedin
chapter2,TVConnections.
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394 DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
57#BDL1BOFM
You can connect an IEEE 1394 camcorder with an IEEE
1394 cable or with analog audio/video cables. In either
case, test using the TVs remote control to operate the
camcorder over the IEEE 1394 cable.
IR Emitter NetCommand and TV
Guide On Screen
An IR emitter cable is included with the TV.
TheNetCommandsystemusesemittersconnectedto
theIR EMITTERjacktocontrolotherdevicessuch
asVCRs,DVDplayers,cableboxes,andsatellitereceiv-
ers.ThiscontrolsystemissharedwiththeTVGuideOn
Screensystem.
1. ConnecttheplugendofthesuppliedIRemittercable
totheIR EMITTER NetCommandjackonthe
TVbackpanel.
2. Runthecableforeachoftheemitterendsunder,
alongside,orovereachdevicetobecontrolledsothat
theemitterendisinfrontoftheareawheretheremote
controlsensorislocated.
3. Positiontheemitterendwiththeemitterbulbfacing
theremotecontrolsensor.Thebulbemitsinfrared
lightinacone-shapedpattern.Placethebulbfar
enoughfromthesensortoallowtheconepatternto
reachthesensor.
TheIRsensorisusuallybehindtheplasticwindow
ofthefrontdisplaypanel.Itissometimesvisible
withtheaidofaflashlightandisnormallyaroundor
squarecutoutbehindtheplastic.Ifyoucannotsee
thesensorandthedevicesOwnersGuidedoesnot
specifythelocation,youcanfinditbyfollowingthese
stepsusingthedevicesremotecontrol:
a. Holdtheremoteaboutone-halfinchfromthe
frontofthedevice.Startingfromoneendofthe
displaywindowplastic,pressthePOWERbutton.
b. Ifthedevicedoesnotrespond,movetheremote
controloneinchtowardthecenterandtryagain.
c. Repeatthisuntilthedeviceresponds.
d. Notethislocationandthenstartoverfromthe
otherendofthedisplaywindowplastic,repeating
untilthedevicerespondsagain.
Theremotecontrolsensorissomewherebetween
thesetwopositions.Thisisusuallyenoughaccu-
racyforplacementoftheIRemitters.
Withsomedevices,theemitterworksbetter
facingdownwardfromthetopofthedevice.
Experimentifneeded.
4. Securetheemitterendsinplaceusingdouble-sided
tape.
5. Placeanyunusedendsbehindthedevicestoprevent
straysignalsfromreachingtheIRsensors.
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394 DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
TV Back Pane|
D I G I T A L
S U R R O U N D
S CH
A/V Rece|ver
Other A/V dev|ce
1.
3.
2.
3.
Figure 14. Connecting IR Emitter NetCommand
In front of a
s|ng|e average-
s|zed dev|ce
On top of a s|ng|e
ta|| dev|ce
In front, shared
by two average-
s|zed dev|ces
IR sensor
IR sensor
IR sensor
IR sensor
Figure 15. IR emitters so the signal can be seen by the
IR sensor on each device.
IMPORTANT
Position IR emitters so that each devices
sensor sees the signal from only one
emitter. Otherwise, a device receiving signals
from multiple sources (remote controls, IR
emitters) may not respond at all.
Q. My VCR (or other device) does not have two sets of stereo audio outputs. How can I connect this devices
audio to both the TV and the A/V Receiver?
A. YouneedtoconnectthedevicetotheTVandthenmakechangestotheA/Vreceiversetup.
1. ConnecttheVCRsaudioandvideototheTV;connectthesinglesetofstereoaudiooutputstotheTVonly.
2. Performtheprocedureforsettingupadeviceconnection.Seechapter3,TVSetup,andthesectionentitled
WhenYouFirstConnectaDevice.NetCommandIRLearningisoptional.
2. PressINPUTtodisplaytheInputSelectionmenu,highlighttheVCRsicon,andpressENTERtoselecttheVCR.
3. PressMENUtoopentheMainmenu,highlighttheNetCommandicon,andpressENTER.
4. UnderAV RECEIVER SETUP,confirmthatthetextboxdisplaysNone.
5. PressEXIT.
Afterperformingthesesteps,theTVwillautomaticallypasstheaudiosignaltotheA/Vreceiver.
Q. I have both the TV stereo audio output and TV digital audio output connected to the same input designa-
tions on my A/V Receiver. How do I switch between analog audio and digital audio?
A. Inmostsetups,analogaudioisalsooutputasdigitalaudio,sonoswitchingisrequired,andthereisnoneedto
connecttheanalogoutput.Insomecircumstances,however,youmayalsoneedanalogaudiofromtheTV.For
example,MP3audioisonlyoutputinanalogformat,soyoumustconnecttheTVsanalogAUDIOOUTPUTtothe
A/VReceiverifyouwanttohearMP3audiothroughtheA/Vreceiver.RefertoyourA/VReceiverusersguideto
findouthowanalog/digitalaudioswitchingworks.
Q. The front panel of my A/V Receiver is too tall or too convex for the IR emitter signal to reach the remote
control sensor of the A/V Receiver. What can I do?
A. Thereareseveralpossiblesolutions.
MounttheIREmitteronthetop,frontedgeoftheA/VReceiverovertheremotecontrolsensor.Usetapeto
secureitinplace.
MounttheIREmitterontheundersideoftheshelfabovetheA/VReceiver(iftheA/VReceiverisinacabinet).
Usedoublesidedtapetosecureitinplace.
Somesmallstick-onemittersfromothermanufacturersmaybecompatiblewiththisTVsIREmitterjacks.
ThesemaybeusedinsteadofthesuppliedIREmitters.
Q. I occasionally need to see the menu from my A/V Receiver. How can I connect it to the TV for this purpose?
A. ConnecttheA/VReceiversvideooutputtoanunusedinputontheTVandthenusetheA/Vreceiversremote
controltodisplaythemenu.
1. ConnectthevideooutputoftheA/VReceivertoanunusedinputontheTV;Input3onthefrontpanelisthe
mostconvenient.TheAutoInputSensingscreenwilldisplayswhentheTVdetectsthenewconnection,
2. PressEXITtoclosethescreenwithoutnamingtheinput.
3. SelectINPUT 3(orotherinputyouused)fromtheInputSelectionmenu:pressINPUT,highlighttheInput3icon,
andpressENTER.
4. PresstheMENUkeyontheA/VreceiversremotecontroltoopentheA/Vreceiversmenu.
5. Whenfinished,disconnecttheA/VreceiversvideoinputfromtheTV.
Q. I have a high definition receiver I would like to connect and it also has an S-video output I would like to be
able use as well. Is there any way to connect this receiver both ways?
A. Yes,thisitemwillappeartwiceintheInputSelectionMenu.JustaddthisunitonceusingtheCOMPONENT
orHDMIinputandonceusingoneoftheS-VIDEOinputs.Mitsubishisuggeststhatyouconnectstereoaudio
outputswiththeS-videoinputonly.
Helpful Hints for NetCommand Connections
3
TV Setup
Guidelines for Setting Up and Using Your New Widescreen TV . . . 34
When You First Power On the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Using the TVs Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
When You First Connect a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Initial NetCommand Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Additional Setup Using the NetCommand Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
34 Chapter 3. TV Setup
Getting Started
1. ReadthesectionentitledImportant Information
About Your TVstartingonpage6.
2. ChoosealocationforyourTV.
Allowatleastfourinchesofspaceonallsidesof
theTVtohelppreventoverheating.
Avoidlocationswherelightmayreflectoffthescreen.
SeethestandrequirementsunderImportant
Information About Your TV.
3. Installthebatteriesintheremotecontrol.See
chapter 4, TV Operation and Features,forinfor-
mationonuseoftheremotecontrol.
4. PlugyourTVintoapoweroutlet.ThePOWERindicator
onthefrontoftheTVwillstartblinkingrapidly.After
thePOWERindicatorstopsblinking,pressthePOWERkey
topowerontheTV.
5. WhentheWelcomescreenappearsthefirsttimeyou
powerontheTV,selectalanguageforTVmenus.You
canlaterchangethelanguagethroughtheSetup menu.
6. SomeTVsareshippedfromthefactorywithdemo
modeactiveforuseinretailstores.Ifdemomodeis
activewhenyoufirstturnontheTV:
a. PressMENU.
b. WhentheMainmenuappearswithSetuphigh-
lighted,pressENTER.
c. WhentheSetupmenuopens,press tohighlight
theon-screenDemo Mode Offbutton.
d. PressENTER.
7. ConnectyourA/VdevicestotheTV(seechapter
2, TV Connections)andperforminitialsetupas
describedinchapter 3, TV Setup. Chapter3also
providesinstructionsforsettingupNetCommand
controlofyourhometheaterandforenablingtheTV
GuideOnScreensystem.
8. YoucannowstartwatchingTVoryoucanperformaddi-
tionalsetupandcustomizationthroughtheTVmenus.
TV Operation
1. Review chapter 4, TV Operation and Features,for
TVfeaturesincluding:
Input Selection (viewing source).Selectacon-
nectedprogramsourcetowatch,suchasaVCR,
DVDplayer,orantenna.PressINPUTontheremote
controltoselectfromiconsfortheTVinputs.See
Input Selection Menu.
Picture Formats.PressFORMATtocyclethrough
picturesizesandshapestofindtheonebest
suitedtotheprogramyourewatching.SeeTV
Signals and Display Formats.
2. TousetheTVtocontrolrecordingsthrough
NetCommand,seechapter 6, NetCommand
Operations.TousetheTVGuideOnScreensystem
Guidelines for Setting Up and Using Your New Widescreen TV
tocontrolrecording,seetheseparateTV Guide On
Screen Interactive Program Guide Users Manual.
3. TounderstanduseoftheInputSelectionmenuwith
NetCommand-controlleddevices,seechapter 6,
NetCommand Operations.
4. IfyouhaveIEEE1394A/Vdevices,seechapter 6,
NetCommand Operations,fordetailsonoperating
suchdevices.
Additional TV Setup
1. Reviewchapter 5, TV Menu Settings,tocustom-
izeTVoperation.PresstheMENUkeytoenterthemenu
system.Someexamplesofsettingsyoumaywishto
changeinclude:
Input Name.Changethedevicenamesthatappear
intheInputSelectionmenu.SeeInput Name
Menu.
Icon Order.Rearrangethedeviceiconsinthe
InputSelectionmenutoputfrequentlyusedicons
nearthefront.SeeIcon Order Menu.
FAV.Createlistsofyourfavoritechannelssoyou
canfindthemquickly.SeeChannel Menu.
Parental Lock.YoucanrestrictTVviewingby
programratingorbytimeofday.Youcanalso
disablethefront-panelbuttonsusefulifyouhave
smallchildren.SeeParental Lock Menu.
Video Settings.Changethevideoadjustments
togetthebestpictureforyourviewingconditions.
SeeAudio/Video Menu.
YoumaywishtochangethePictureModefromthe
defaultBrillianttoeitherBrightorNatural,which
aresuitableformosthomeviewingenvironments.
2. ToprogramtheremotecontroltooperateA/Vdevices
notunderNetCommandcontrol,seeAppendix D,
Programming the Remote Control.
TV Care
Lamp Cartridge.Whenthelampcartridgeneeds
replacement,replace the lamp yourself and
save the cost of a service call.SeeAppendix
Cforinstructions.
General Cleaning.TokeepyourTVlookingits
best,seethecleaningrecommendationsunder
Important Information About Your TV.
Assistance
Fortroubleshooting,service,andproductsupport,
seeAppendix E.
Forwarrantyinformation,seetheTVwarrantyin
thebackofthisbook.
Chapter 3. TV Setup 35
Installing the Remote Control
Batteries
1. Removetheremotecontrolsbackcoverbygently
pressinginthetabandliftingoffthecover.
2. Loadthebatteries,makingsurethepolarities(+)and
(-)arecorrect.Forbestresults,insertthenegative(-)
endfirst.
3. Snapthecoverbackinplace.
2
1
The remote control requires two AA alkaline batteries.
TV Tips
Turning the TV On or Off
ToturntheTVonoroff,pointtheremotecontrolatthe
frontoftheTVandpressthePOWERbutton.Alternatively,
pressthePOWERbuttononthefrontpaneloftheTV.
If You Turn Off the TV by Mistake
1. PressPOWERagainwithinabout30seconds,while
thelampisstillhot,tohavetheTVcomebackon
immediately.
2. IftheLAMPindicatorstartsblinking(about30
secondsafteryoushutoffpower),wait about one
minute for the LAMP indicator to stop blinking and
press POWER to turn the TV on again.
Controlling Sound Volume
PressVOL / toadjustthesoundlevel.
Changing Channels
Tochangechannels:
Enterthechannelnumberusingthenumberkeys
ontheremotecontrolandpressENTER.Foratwo-
partdigitalchannel,suchas3-1,press3
CANCEL 1to
enteradash(separator).
PressCH / tochangechannelsonechannelat
atime.
PressandholdCH / tomovequicklythrough
channels.
PressQV(QuickView)toswitchbacktotheprevi-
ouslytunedchannel.
UsetheFAV(Favorites)featuretosetuplistsof
favoritechannelsandtunetothemwiththeFAVkey.
SeeChannelMenuinchapter5.
NOTE: Memorizechannelstomakefndingchannels
easier.
Care of the Remote Control
Useonlyalkalinebatteries.
Bewithin20feetoftheequipment.
Donotpresstwoormorebuttonsatthesametime
unlessinstructedtodoso.
Donotallowunittogetwetorbecomeheated.
Avoiddroppingonhardsurfaces.
Donotuseharshchemicalstoclean.Useonlyasoft,
lightlymoistenedcloth.
Donotmixoldandnewbatteries.
Donotheat,takeapart,orthrowbatteriesintofire.
When You First Power On the TV
Choosing a Language for Menus
WhenyoupowerontheTVforthefirsttime,youcan
selecteitherEnglishorSpanishforallmenus.Youcan
laterchangethelanguagethroughtheSetupmenu.
Figure 1. The Welcome screen lets you change the menu
language when you first power on the TV.
TV Guide On Screen Setup Reminder
IfyoudonotsetuptheTVGuideOnScreensystemwhen
youfirstturnontheTV,areminderscreenwillappearthe
nextsixtimesyouturnontheTV(seefigure2).Tosetup
theTVGuideOnScreensystem,seeAdditionalSetup
withtheNetCommandMenulaterinthischapter.
Figure 2. TV Guide On Screen setup reminder
Using the TVs Setup Menu
UsetheSetupmenuforbasicTVsetupoptions.To
displaytheSetupmenu,pressMENUtoopentheMain
menu.WiththeSetupiconhighlighted,pressENTER.
Figure 3. Open the Setup menu from the Main menu.
Language (Setup Menu)
Choosetodisplayon-screenmenusineitherEnglishor
Spanish(Espaol).
Tolistentoaudioinotherlanguages(whenavailable),see
chapter5,TVMenuSettings,andtheAudioSettings
section.ThenrefertoeitherSAP(analogsignal)or
Language(digitalsignal).
Memorize Channels (Setup Menu)
For ANT 1/MAIN and ANT 2/AUX
Thememorizationprocessperformstwoscansofallpos-
siblechannelsontheselectedANTinput.Analogchan-
nelsarescannedfirst,thentheprocessisrepeatedfor
digitalchannels.Channelmemorizationmaytakeupto15
minutestocomplete.
To start channel memorization
1. Highlightaninputselectionbasedonyourconnections:
Input Condition
Ant1Air,
Ant2Air
Whenconnectedtoanindoor/outdoor
antenna
Ant1Cable,
Ant2Cable
Whenconnectedtodirectcable(nocable
box)
2. PressENTERtostartautomaticchannelmemorization.
To stop channel memorization before completion
PressCANCEL.
ChannelsmemorizedbeforeyoupressedCANCELare
retainedinmemory.Ifyourestartmemorization,allprevi-
ouslymemorizedchannelsfortheselectedantennainput
areerasedandtheprocessrestarts.
Afterchannelmemorization,pressCH / totuneto
memorizedchannels.SelecttheChannelmenuforfurther
channelediting,suchasaddinganddeletingchannels
frommemory,namingchannels,andsavingfavoritechan-
nelsincustommemorybanks.
Note:
IfusingaCableCARD,thecompletelistof
availablechannelsisprovidedthroughthe
CableCARDandtheANT 1optionisgrayedout.
IntheTVGuideOnScreensystem,thechan-
nelsdisplayedandtheorderinwhichtheyare
displayedareindependentoftheTVschannel
memorization.RefertotheTV Guide On Screen
Interactive Program Guide Users Manualfor
detailedinstructionsoneditingchannelsshown
inthisguide.
Clock (Setup Menu)
SettheclockifyouwishtousetheTVsTimerfunctionor
scheduleNetCommand-controlledrecordings.Youcan
useeitherthemanualorautomethodtosettheclock.
Figure 4. Clock submenu
Setting the Clock Manually
Time
Withthehourhighlightedinyellowcharacters,press
repeatedlytoslowlyincrementthehourandassociated
AM/PM indicatororpressandholdtoquicklyincrement
thehour.PressENTERtohighlighttheminutesinyellow.
Press tosettheminutes.Press tomovetothe
Datebox.
Date
Withthemonthhighlightedinyellowcharacters,press
toselectthecorrectmonth.PressENTERtohighlightthe
day.Press toselectthecorrectday.PressENTER
tohighlighttheyear.Press toselectthecurrentyear.
Press tomovetotheTime Zonebox.
Time Zone
Selectyourcorrecttimezone.Press or toselect
thetimezoneforyourarea(Atlantic, Eastern, Central,
Mountain, Pacific, AlaskaorHawaii).Press tomove
totheDaylight Savingsbox.
Daylight Savings
Press or toselecteitherAppliesorIgnore,depending
onwhetherornotdaylightsavingstimeisusedinyourarea.
Timer (Setup Menu)
Figure 5. Timer submenu
TheTimerfeatureallowsyoutosetadayandtimeforthe
TVtoturnonautomaticallyandthedeviceandchannelto
displaywhenitswitcheson.IftheTVisalreadyonatthe
requestedtime,theTVautomaticallytunestothechannel
youdesignatedintheTimermenu.
WhentheTimerturnsontheTV,thescreendisplaysthe
messagePressabuttonfortheTVtostayon.Press
anybuttonontheremotecontrolwithinfiveminutesifyou
wishtheTVtoremainon.
Note: TheTVclockmustbesetbeforeyoucanusethe
Timerfeature.
On/Off
Press toenableordisabletheTimer.Press to
movetotheDaybox.
Note: IfClock SettingissettoManual,eachtimethetime
changeoccurs,youmustopenthismenuandsetthe
TVsclockaheadorback.
IfyouhaveselectedAutoforClock Setting,theTVs
clockadjustsautomaticallytodaylightsavingstime.
Setting the Clock Automatically
SelecttheTime ZoneandtheDaylight Savings(DST)
optionsforyourstate.Press toselectAppliesor
Ignore.YoumaythentunetoachannelonANT 1or
ANT 2thatusesExtendedDataService(XDS)timedata,
typicallyaPBSchannel.WithAutoselected,theTVauto-
maticallyretrievesthecorrecttimeanddateinformation
fromthischannel.
Beawarethatifachanneldisplaysincorrecttimeinforma-
tion,itisbecauseofinformationsentfromthebroadcaster
andisnotadefectoftheTV.
Note: Youmayfindthatsomechannelssendtheincor-
recttimeandtheTVclockisreseteverytimeyou
tunetothosechannels.Topreventunwanted
clockresets,firstusetheAutomethodtosetthe
clockfromachannelsendingthecorrecttime,
thenchangethemethodtoManual.
Setup Menu, continued
Set Day
SelectthedayordaysthattheTVwillturnonautomati-
cally.Press or toselectDaily, Mon-Fri(Monday
throughFriday),orindividualdaysoftheweek.Press to
movetotheTimebox.
Set Time
Withthehourhighlightedinyellowcharacters,press
repeatedlytoslowlyincrementthehourandassociated
AM/PM indicatororpressandholdtoquicklyincrement
thehour.PressENTERtohighlighttheminutes.Press
tosettheminutes.Press tomovetotheDevicebox.
Device
Press or toselectthedevicetousewhentheTimer
turnsontheTV.IftheTVisalreadyonattheselected
time,theTimerwillswitchtheTVtothisdevice.Press
tomovetotheChannelbox.
Channel
Whentheselecteddeviceisanantenna,youcanselecta
channelfortheTVtotunetowhenitcomeson.Highlight
theChannelboxand
pressCH / or tochoosefrommemorized
channels.
Enterachannelnumberfromtheremotecontrol.
Youcanalsoentersub-channelnumbersfor
digitalchannelsbyusingthe/CANCELkey.
Note: ThePOWER/TIMERindicatorfashesgreenwhentheTV
isofftoindicatetheTVTimerhasbeenset.
Energy Mode (Setup Menu)
TheEnergyModeoptionletsyouselecttheTVslevelof
powerconsumptionwhiletheTVisturnedoff.Choose
Setup Menu, continued
eitherLow PowerorFast Power On.TheLow Power
settinguseslessenergy,butTVpower-ontakeslonger.
ThedefaultisFast Power On.KeepthissettingatFast
Power Onifyou:
ExpecttousetheTVTimerfunctiontoturnonthe
TVatapreselectedtime.
NeedtheTVClocktoremainaccuratefortheTV
TimerandforschedulingNetCommand-controlled
recordings.WiththeLow Powersetting,you
mustresettheTVClockiftheTVisleftturnedoff
forover48hours.
WishtoreceiveupdatestotheTVGuideOn
Screenprogramlistings.
Needfasterpoweron.
WishtoturnofftheTVwhilemakingaNetCom-
mand-controlledrecording.
WishtoschedulefutureNetCommand-controlled
recordingsforatimewhentheTVwillbeoff.
Note: CableCARDandTVGuideOnScreenre-
quiretheFast Power Onsetting.Ifyouinserta
CableCARDoractivateTVGuideOnScreen,the
TVwillautomaticallyoverrideaLow Powersetting
andchangetotheFast Power Onsetting.
Demo Mode Off (Setup Menu)
IfDemoModeisactive,highlighttheDemo Mode Off
buttonandpressENTER.
Software Version (Setup Menu)
Forservicingpurposes,theTVssoftwareversionisdis-
playedattheupperrightsideoftheSetupmenu.
When You First Connect a Device
Duringtheinitialset-upprocessforadevice,theTVwill:
a. detecttheconnecteddevice
b. promptyoutoidentifythedevicebyname
c. promptyoutoperformNetCommandset-upfor
thedevice,ifapplicable
d. repeattheabovestepsforanyadditionalnewly
connecteddevices
ClearThought Easy Connect Auto Input Sensing
ThisTVsClearThoughtautoinputsensingfeature
detectsmostconnectionsautomatically.Thefirsttime
youconnecttoaClearThoughtinput,youarepromptedto
selectanamefortheconnecteddevice.Thetablebelow
definesconnectionstheTVcandetect.
Auto Detection Active No Auto Detection
INPUT 1, 2, 3videojacks ANT 1/ANT 2
COMPONENTvideojacks
MONITOR OUT
(alljacks)
HDMI*
PC-DVI*
AllAUDIOjacks
IEEE 1394
* Ifthedeviceispoweredoffwhenconnected,detec-
tionoccurswhenthedeviceisnextpoweredon.
1. ConnectyourdevicestotheTV,makingnoteofwhich
TVinputyouhaveusedforeachdevice.
TheTVandthedevicescanbeeitheronoroffwhen
connecting.IftheTVispoweredoff,thedetection
processwilloccurthenexttimeyouturnontheTV.
2. Formostdevices,theAutoInputSensingscreen
opens(seefigure6).Withthetextboxhighlighted,
press toselectanameforthedevicefromthe
followinglistofnames:
Cablebox
Camcorder
DVD
DVD2
DVR(digitalvideorecorder,recordableDVD)
Game
HD Disc (high-definitiondisc)
Satellite
VCR
ThenameyouassignherewillappearintheInput
Selectionmenuandcanbechangedlaterthroughthe
InputNamemenu.
Ifyouselectoneofthedevicenamescheckedin
thetableabove,theon-screenLearnbuttonwill
changefromgrayedouttofullcolor,indicatingthat
NetCommandlearningisavailableforthedevice.
NetCommand
Learn button
(initially grayed out)
Name you
select for
the input
TV connec-
tion used for
this device
Figure 6. The Auto Input Sensing screen appears when a
device is first detected. Select a name for the connected
device in this screen.
3. Nowyoucaneither:
HighlightLearnandpressENTERtoperform
NetCommandlearningforthedevice,ifappli-
cable(recommended).NetCommandlearning
canbeusedtocontrolthedevicetypeschecked
intheprecedinglist.SeeInitialNetCommand
Setuplaterinthischapter.Youcanperform
NetCommandsetupatalatertime,ifpreferred,by
usingtheLearnoptionintheNetCommandmenu.
PressEXITtoclosethescreen.TheTVwilldisplay
theAutoInputSensingscreenforthenextcon-
nectionitfinds.
Note: TocontinuewithNetCommandsetupforthecur-
rentdevice:
Youmusthaveconnectedandproperlyplaced
NetCommandIRemitters(seechapter2,TV
Connections).
Youmusthaveathandtheremotecontrolsfor
theTVandthecurrentdevice.
More About Auto Input Sensing
Becarefultochooseadifferentnameforeachinput.
Youcanchangetheinputnameatalatertimeusing
theInputNamemenu.
Ifyoudisconnectadeviceandthenlaterconnecta
differentdevicetothevacatedjack,usetheInput
Namemenutoupdatethedevicename.Ifyouwant
thedeviceunderNetCommandcontrol,youmust
performNetCommandlearningforthenewdevice.
Antennainputs(ANT 1/ANT 2),audioconnections,
andTVoutputsareneverdetected.
IEEE 1394 Connections
TheNew1394Devicescreenappearsifyouconnected
anIEEE1394device.Seefigure7.IEEE1394devicesare
automaticallyunderNetCommandcontrol.TheTVcan
recognizeuptosevenIEEE1394devicesatonetime.If
youconnectmorethanonedeviceofthesametype,a
uniqueidentifierisaddedtothenameforeachone.For
example,ifyouconnectthreeA/Vdiscs,youmayseeAV
Disc, AV Disc1, AV Disc2.
Figure 7. The New 1394 Device screen shows the device
name and includes a check box for an associated analog
connection.
IEEE 1394 Device with an Analog Connection
SomeIEEE1394deviceshavebothdigitalandanalog
outputstotheTV.Ifyouhavesuchadevice,placea
checkmarkintheAnalog Connectioncheckboxtoallow
youtousetheTVsInputSelectionmenutoselecteither
theanalogordigitaloutput.
When You First Connect a Device,
continued
Forinstructionsonswitchingbetweenanaloganddigital
outputs,seechapter6,NetCommandOperations.
IfyourIEEE1394devicecanbeconnectedtotheTVwith
ananalogconnection,followtheinstructionsbelow.
1. ConnectthedevicetotheTVwith an IEEE 1394
cable first.
2. WhentheNew1394Devicescreenappearswiththe
Analog Connectioncheckboxhighlighted,press
ENTERtoenteracheckmark.
3. IntheNew1394Devicescreen,notethename
assignedtothedevice,asyouwillneedtousethe
samenameinalaterstep.Seefigure7,New1394
Devicescreen.
4. ConnectthedevicetotheTVwiththesupplemental
analogcable.
5. ThenextscreenistheautoInputSensingscreen
(seefigure6)inwhichyoucanselectanameforthe
device.Ifyouselectthewrongnameforthedevice,
youwillbeunabletoswitchbetweentheanalogand
digitalinputstotheTV.
Ifthedeviceisacablebox,selectthenameCABLE
asthenamefortheanaloginput.
Note: Ifyouconnectedthecablesinreversesequence
(analogfrst),youwilllaterneedtochangethe
inputnameintheInputNamemenu.
a. Switchtoanyviewingdeviceotherthanthe
oneyouwishtochange(pressINPUTtoopen
theInputSelectionmenu).
b. OpentheNetCommandmenuandthenopen
theInputNamemenu.
c. Highlightthetextboxfortheanaloginput
usedfortheIEEE1394device.
d. Press toscrollthroughtheavailable
namestodisplaythenameyouearliernoted
fortheIEEE1394device.
e. PressEXIT.
Chapter 3. TV Setup 41 Chapter 3. TV Setup 41
NetCommand Specialized Device Keys
Refertothischartwhenlearningdevicekeys.WriteinfunctionsyouassigntotheF1F4keys.
* These are paired functions (e.g. Power and Power Off). When the original remote control uses a single button for
both functions, learn only the first of the paired functions.
** This function is performed only when the Input Selection Menu is displayed and the device icon is highlighted.
*** Channel Up/Down as Guide Page Up/Down in effect only after pressing GUIDE; returns to channel functions after
pressing ENTER or CANCEL.
If there are two ENTER keys, learn the ENTER key used for channel selection here. The ENTER button on the
remote sends the correct IR code when digits are entered.
Learn the sub-channel separator if a special key is used to add a separator (dash or dot) in a digital channel. Press
the CANCEL button on the remote to add the separator
DVD includes functions for DVD, DVD2, DVR, and HD disc.
The GUIDE key is unavailable for a cable box guide when TV Guide On Screen is enabled.
A/V
Receiver
Cable, Sat,
DVD
VCR
Learning Screen
Check Box Name
Function
Name on
TV Remote
X X X Power* PowerOnorPowerOn/Off POWER**
X X X Power(Off)* PowerOff POWER**
X VolumeUp VolumeUp VOL
X VolumeDown VolumeDown VOL
X Mute Mute MUTE
X Input(1-4) AVRInputSelect
Automatic(when
deviceisselected)
X X ChannelUp ChannelScanUp CH
X X ChannelDown ChannelScanDown CH
X X Recall LastChannelRecall QV
X Guide Discmenuortopmenu GUIDE
X X
AdjustUp,Down,Left,
Right
ArrowmoveUp,Down,Left,Right
X X Enter Enter/Select ENTER
X X Menu DeviceMenuorSetupMenu MENU **
X X Cancel CancelorExit CANCEL
X X Info StatusInformationDisplay INFO (presstwice)
X PageUp GuidePageUp CH ***
X PageDown GuidePageDown CH ***
X X Play Play
(PLAY)
X X Stop Stop
(STOP)
X X Forward FastForward/FwdSearch
(FAST FORWARD)
X X Rewind Rewind/ReverseSearch
(REVERSE)
X X Pause Pause
(PAUSE)
X X Record Record
(RECORD)
X X Enter(digits) Enterforchannelnumbers ENTER
X X 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0
X Input InputChange GUIDE**
X
Sub-channelsepara-
tor
DigitalSubchannel
CANCEL
(/CANCEL)
X X F1 F1
X X F2 F2
X X F3 F3
X X F4 F4
ASSIGN YOUR
CHOICE OF
SPECIALIZED
FUNCTIONS
3. IntheAutoInputsensingscreen(seefigure8),high-
lighttheLearnbuttonandpressENTERtoopenthe
Learnscreenforthedevice(seefigure9).
NetCommand
Learn button
Name you select
for the device
Figure 8. Highlight the Auto Input Sensing screens Learn
button and press ENTER to open the NetCommand Learn
screen.
Figure 9. In the NetCommand Learn screen, you tell the
TV to remember key commands to send to another device
via an IR emitter.
4. ThefirstfunctionhighlightedintheLearnscreenis
alwaysPower (On).AimtheTVsremotecontrolat
theTVandpressENTERtobeginlearningforthatfunc-
tion.
5. WhenthePower (On)textstartsflashing,aimthe
devicesremotecontrolattheTVandpressandhold
thePOWERkeyuntilacheckmarkappearsinthebox.
Ifthetextstopsflashingbeforethecheckmark
appears,repeatthisstep.
6. IfthedevicehasaseparatePOWER OFFkey,press to
highlightthecheckboxforPower Off.Repeatthe
precedingsteptolearnthePOWER OFFkey.
If device has no POWER OFF key, skip this step.
By completing learning for the power keys, the TVs
remote control now operates the power function for
the device when you set it as the current viewing
device in the Input Selection menu. Point the remote
control at the TV to control the device.
Initial NetCommand Setup
What You Need to Know About NetCommand
NetCommandsetupisoptional.
NetCommandoperatesbysendingsignalsfromthe
TVtoyourotherdevicesviatheIRemitters,tellingthe
devicestoplay,record,changeinputs,adjustvolume,
changechannelsandmanymorefunctions.Allthis
isaccomplishedwiththeTVsremotecontrolandthe
slideswitchleftintheTVposition.
TheIRLearningfeatureofNetCommandallowsthe
TVtolearntheremotecontrolsignalsforyourA/V
devices.
NetCommandcancontrolIEEE1394devicesby
sendingcontrolsignalsoveraFireWirecable.
YoucanchoosethelevelofNetCommandcontrolfor
yourhometheater.
Limited Setup. Performalimitedsetupifyou:
WantNetCommandtocontrolonlyafew
devices,suchastheTV,aplaybackdevice
(likeaDVDplayer),andacablebox.Withthis
setup,youcanusetheTVsremotecontrolto
operatethesedevices.
WanttouseTVGuideOnScreentocontrol
yourcableboxandVCRand/orA/Vdisc.
Afterperformingthissetup,youcanusethe
TVsremotecontroltooperatethesedevices.
WanttheeaseandflexibilityofNetCommand-
controlledrecording,withseamlesssetupof
time-delayedorimmediaterecordingsamong
networkeddevices.
Full Setup. Performafullsetupifyouwantto
giveNetCommandthefollowingadditonalcontrol:
ControlasurroundsoundA/Vreceiver.
Automaticallychangeinputselectionsforthe
A/Vreceiver.
Initial NetCommand Setup for Most Device
Types
TosetupanA/Vreceiver,seeAdditionalSetupUsing
theNetCommandMenulaterinthischapter.
Forsetuplater,ortomakechangestothesetup,see
AdditionalSetupUsingtheNetCommandMenulater
inthischapter.
1. ConnectandpositiontheIRemittersasdescribedin
chapter2,TVConnections.
2. HavetheremotecontrolsfortheTVandtheother
devicereadybeforebeginning.SettheTVremote
controlsslideswitchtotheTVposition.
Initial NetCommand Setup,
continued
7. Pressthe keysontheTVsremotecontrol
tohighlightotherkeysonthelist.Repeatsteps4
and5foreachadditionalfunctionyouwishtocontrol
throughNetCommand.
8. Ifthedevicesremotecontrolhaskeysthatdonot
appearinthelist,youcanassociateuptofourkeys
withtheF1throughF4keys.Forexample,foraDVD
player,assigntheF1andF2keystotheDVDplayers
CHAPTER SKIP FORWARDandCHAPTER SKIP BACKkeys.Perform
NetCommandsetupfortheFkeysthesameasyoudid
forthenamedkeys.
9. PressEXITtocontinuewithsetupforadditionaldevices.
Additional Setup Using the
NetCommand Menu
UsetheNetCommandmenuatanytimeto:
SeealistofallconnectionstotheTV.
SetupTVGuideOnScreenormakechangestothe
setup.
AddNetCommandcontroltoadevice.UsetheLearn
buttontoopentheNetCommandLearnscreenforthe
currentlyselecteddevice.
Addorremovespecificdevicekeysfrom
NetCommandcontrol.
AddNetCommandcontroltoanA/Vreceiver.When
theA/Vreceiveristheaudiosource,audiofroma
devicecanbeautomaticallyswitchedtotheA/V
receiverwhenthedeviceisselectedintheTVsInput
Selectionmenu.
Assignmeaningfulnamestotheinputiconsinthe
InputSelectionmenu(seechapter5,TVMenuSet-
tings).
ChangetheorderoficonsintheInputSelectionmenu
(seechapter5,TVMenuSettings).
ToopentheNetCommandmenu,pressMENUtofirstopen
theMainmenu,highlighttheNetCommandicon,and
pressENTER.Seefigure10.
Figure 10. Additional NetCommand setup options are
accessible through the NetCommand menu.
Review TV Connections
YoucanverifyTVconnectionsduringTVsetuporat
anytimeafterwardusingtheReviewscreen.Inthe
NetCommandmenu,press tohighlightReview
andpressENTERtodisplaytheReviewscreen(seefigure
11).
Figure 11. The Review screen lists all TV connections.
IEEE 1394 devices are listed separately on the right.
Set Up TV Guide On Screen
SetupoftheTVGuideOnScreensystemisoptional.
ManyfeaturesofTVGuideOnScreenareavail-
ablewithoutNetCommandcontrol.Forexample,
programlistings,programsearches,andprogram
remindersfunctionwithoutNetCommand.
Forfullfunctionality,youmustsetup
NetCommandcontrolofanydeviceassociated
withTVGuideOnScreen,e.g.,arecordingdevice
ifyouwishtosetuprecordingsthroughTVGuide
OnScreen.
1. HighlighttheGuidebuttonintheNetCommandmenu
andpressENTERtodisplayTVGuideOnScreensetup
options.
2. ToenabletheTVGuideOnScreensystem,highlight
theOnbutton.Ifyouwishtodisablethesystem,high-
lighttheOffbutton.
NetCommand Menu, continued
Figure 12. TV Guide On Screen setup
3. Selectprogramsourcesforthelistings.Youcan
selectoneover-the-airsourceandonecablesource
forTVGuideOnScreen.If,however,youhavemul-
tiplecablesources,thechannel-numberassignments
maynotmatchupcorrectly.Seethefollowingtable
andnotesforthepreferredconnectioncombinations.
If One Source Is:
The Other Source Can Be:
Ant-1 Air Ant-2 Air
CableBox
CableCard N/A
Ant-1ChannelsviaCable N/A
Ant-2ChannelsviaCable N/A
Note:
InputstoTVGuideOnScreencaninclude:
Onlyoneover-the-airsource
Onlyonecablesource
AnantennainputisrequiredfordownloadingTV
GuideOnScreenschedules.Ifyourcableboxis
connectedusingHDMIorIEEE-1394,youmustalso
connectanantennainput.
IfyourcableboxisconnectedtoaCOMPONENT
input,besuretheboxissettosendanalogchannels
as480i.Ifthisisnotpossible,addanantennainput.
4. MovetotheZIP Codeboxandenterthefive-digitZIP
codeforyourlocation.Toreceivethecorrectprogram
listingsforyourarea,youmustentertheZIPcode.
FordetailedinformationonusingtheTVGuideOnScreen
system,pleaseseetheseparateTV Guide On Screen
Interactive Program Guide Users Manual.
Add or Remove Device Keys from
NetCommand Control
1. ToLearndevicekeys,youmustbewatchingthe
device.PressINPUT,highlighttheiconfortheaffected
device,andpressENTER.
2. OpentheNetCommandmenu,highlighttheLearn
button,andpressENTER.
3. WhentheLearnscreendisplays,continueas
describedearlierunderInitialNetCommandSetupfor
MostDeviceTypes.
To Replace One Device with Another on an
Input Jack
1. Disconnectthedeviceyouwishtoremovefromthe
TV.
2. Connectthenewdevicetothevacatedjack.
3. BeforeselectingtheinputfromtheInputSelec-
tionmenu,opentheInputNamemenufromthe
NetCommandmenu.
4. Highlighttheinputtextboxandpress toselecta
devicenamefromthelistassociatedwiththeinput.
5. PressINPUTtoopentheInputSelectionmenu.High-
lighttheinputiconandpressENTER.
6. PressMENUandreturntotheNetCommandmenu.
7. HighlighttheLearnbuttonandpressENTER.
8. WhentheLearnscreendisplays,continueas
describedearlierunderInitialNetCommandSetupfor
MostDeviceTypes.
9. PressEXITwhenfinished.
Other Options on the NetCommand Menu
ForInput NameandIcon Orderoptions,seechapter
5,TVMenuSettings.
UsethePC DVI Inputoptiontospecifythetypeof
videosignalcomingfromyourcomputer.Formore
aboutthisoption,seechapter7,UsingtheTVwitha
PersonalComputer.
Set Up NetCommand Control of an A/V
Receiver
PerformthissetuptoenabletheA/Vreceivertoswitch
automaticallytothecorrectaudioinputwhenyouselecta
deviceintheTVsInputSelectionmenu.Youmusthaveat
handtheremotecontrolsforboththeTVandA/Vreceiver
toperformthisprocedure.
ThisisasamplesetupforaDVDplayer,directantennaor
directcable(toANT 1orANT 2),andananalogVCR.
Thisexampleillustratesthreescenariosforsendingaudio
toanA/Vreceiver:
DigitalSurroundSound.Adevice(e.g.,DVDplayer,
cablebox,satellitereceiver)cansenddigitalsurround
soundsuchasDolbyDigitalorDTSdirectlytotheA/V
receiver,bypassingtheTVentirely.ADVDplayeris
usedinthisexample.
Itisalsopossibleforyoursetuptoincludetwo(or
more)deviceswithdigitalsurroundsoundconnected
directlytotheA/Vreceiver.Thesedevicescouldbe
yourDVDplayerplusacableboxorsatellitereceiver.
AudioDirectlyfromTV.AudiofromANT 1and
ANT 2,memorycards,andIEEE1394devicesis
senttotheA/VreceiverfromtheTVsanalogAUDIO
OUT LEFT/RIGHTorDIGITAL AUDIO OUT.In
thissetup,youtellNetCommandtoswitchtotheA/V
receiversdesignatedTVaudioinput.
AnalogStereoOutputOnly.Audiofromsources
withonlyanalogstereooutput(suchasaVCR)canbe
sentdirectlytotheA/VreceiverordirectlytotheTV
firstandthenontotheA/Vreceiver.
Mitsubishirecommendsyousendaudiodirectlytothe
TV,whichcanconvertthesignaltodigitalaudioand
sendittoadigitalA/Vreceiverasdigitalaudio.
Part 1: Learn IR Codes for A/V Receiver Inputs
1. ConnectyourA/VreceivertotheTVandDVDplayer.
Seechapter2,TVConnections,forsuggestions.
2. OpentheNetCommandmenu.
3. HighlighttheLearnbuttonunderAV RECEIVER
SETUPandpressENTERtodisplaytheAVReceiver
(AVR)Learnscreen.Seefigure13.
WhentheAVReceiverLearnscreenopens,the
highlightisonthecheckboxforInput 1.Theterms
Input 1Input 4aregenericreferencestotheA/V
receiverinputsforwhichtheTVcanlearnIRcodes.
4. Inthisexample,theIRcodefortheA/VreceiversTV
AudioinputwillbelearnedasInput 1.
PressENTERontheTVsremotecontrolandwhilethe
textInput 1isflashing,pressandholdtheTV INPUTkey
ontheA/Vreceiversremotecontrol.
5. Whenacheckappearsinthecheckbox,releasethe
TV INPUTkey.
A/V Receiver Audio Inputs
(numbers 14 refer to the IR learning sequence in this screen)
Text Boxes for You to Enter the
Name of the Destination A/V
Receiver Audio Input
A/V Receiver Key Commands
the TV Can Send to the A/V
Receiver When Learned
Figure 13. The AV Receiver (AVR) Learn screen lets you
set up NetCommand control of your A/V receiver.
6. Press tohighlightthetextboxforInput 1.Toenter
aname:
Use ontheTVsremotecontroltoselecta
character.
PressENTERtosettheletterandmovethehighlight
tothenextletter.
Todeletealetter,highlightitandpressCANCEL
orpress toinsertablankspace(underscore
character).
Toreturnthehighlighttothefirstcharacter,
repeatedlypressCANCEL.
Toreturntothedefaultname,highlightthefirst
characterandpressCANCEL.
7. Press tohighlightthecheckboxforInput 2.In
thisexample,theIRcodefortheA/VreceiversDVD
AudioinputwillbelearnedasInput 2.
8. PressENTERontheTVsremotecontrolandwhilethe
textInput 2isflashing,pressandholdtheDVD INPUTkey
ontheA/Vreceiversremotecontrol.
9. Whenacheckappearsinthecheckbox,releasethe
DVDkey.
10. Press tohighlightthetextboxforInput 2.Enter
thenameDVD.Use toenterthenameTV.
PressENTERtoseteachletter.
11. Repeatsteps7through10foranyadditionalA/V
receiverinputsconnectedtootherdevices.
Figure 14. Assign names
to identify learned A/V
receiver audio inputs
IMPORTANT
All audio from what you are watching on
the TV is always available as an output on
both the TVs AUDIO OUT LEFT/RIGHT and
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jacks.
To use the surround sound capabilities of your
A/V receiver however, you must connect your
DVD player, satellite receiver, or cable box
directly to the A/V receiver, as surround sound
may not be available from the TVs audio output.
Part 2: Learn A/V Receiver Power and Volume Keys
1. Press tohighlightthecheckboxforPower On.
2. PressENTERontheTVsremotecontrolandwhilethe
textPower Onisflashing,pressandholdthePOWER
or POWER ONkeyontheA/Vreceiversremotecontrol.
3. IfyourA/VreceiverhasaseparatePOWER OFFkey,press
tohighlightthecheckboxforPower Off.Repeat
theprecedingsteptolearnthePOWER OFFkey.
If your A/V receiver has no POWER OFF key, skip this step.
4. Press tohighlightadditionalcheckboxesand
repeatstep2fortheotherA/Vreceiverkeys.
5. Whenallkeyshavebeenlearned,pressEXIT.
Figure 15. Perform NetCommand
learning for these A/V receiver
functions.
Part 3: Tell the TV Where Connected Devices
Send Audio
Digital Surround Sound
1. PressINPUTtodisplaytheInputSelectionmenu.
2. HighlighttheiconfortheDVDplayerandpressENTERto
switchtotheDVDinput.
3. PressMENUandopentheNetCommandmenu.
4. HighlightthetextboxunderAV RECEIVER SETUP.
5. Press tomovethroughthelisttoDVD.
ThissettingtellstheTVthatdigitalsurroundsound
fromtheDVDplayerisconnecteddirectlytotheA/V
receiversDVD AUDIOinput.
Figure 16. A/V receiver setup
indicating the DVD players audio
output is connected directly to
the A/V receivers DVD Audio
input.
6. PressEXITtoclosethescreen.
Audio Directly from TV
2. Highlighttheiconforanantennainput(ANT 1or
ANT 2)andpressENTERtoswitchtotheinput.
5. Press tomovethroughthelisttoTV.Thisisthelist
ofA/VreceiverinputsyounamedintheAVReceiver
(AVR)Learnscreen(seefigure13).
TheTVsettinghereindicatesthataudiooutfrom
theTV(DIGITAL AUDIO OUTorAUDIO OUT
LEFT/RIGHT)issenttotheA/VreceiversTV
AUDIOinput.AudiofromANT 1andANT 2,
memorycards,andIEEE1394devicesmustgotothe
A/VreceiverfromtheTVsaudiooutputsasthereis
nowaytosendtheaudiodirectlytotheA/Vreceiver.
indicating that the TVs audio
output (DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT or AUDIO OUT LEFT/
RIGHT) is connected to the
A/V receiver input named TV
AUDIO.
Analog Audio (e.g., analog VCR)
2. HighlighttheiconfortheVCRandpressENTERto
switchtotheVCRinput.
5. ConfirmthatthesettingisatNone,thedefault.
ThissettingtellstheTVtoautomaticallytransferVCR
audiototheA/Vreceiver.TheTVconvertsanalog
audiotodigitalforouputtoadigitalA/Vreceiver.
indicating the analog VCRs
audio output is automatically
sent to the A/V receiver via the
TVs audio output.
IMPORTANT
To hear audio that is sent from the TV to the A/V
receiver, you must have:
physically connected the TV to the A/V receiver
learned the IR codes for the A/V receiver inputs
chosenthecorrectinputunderNetCommand
AV RECEIVER SETUP
selected the A/V receiver in the Input Selection
menu
If you hear no audio from the A/V receiver, open
the NetCommand menu and perform the proce-
dure in Part 3, Audio Directly from TV or Analog
Audio (e.g. analog VCR.
Note that all audio should be sent through the TVs
audio outputs unless you have surround sound
audio going from the device directly to the A/V
receiver.
TV Operation and Features
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Choosing a Program Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
ChannelView Channel Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Split Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
TV Signals and Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Memory Card Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4
48 Chapter 4. TV Operation and Features
Remote Control
Overview
Figure 1, next page
1. Slide Switch:SelectstheA/Vdevicetobecontrolled
bytheremotecontrol.SettheslideswitchtoTVfor
operationoftheTV,NetCommand-controlleddevices,
andIEEE1394devices.Controlofadditionaldevices
requiresprograming(seeAppendixD,Programming
theRemoteControl..
2. SLEEP:SetstheTVtoturnoffwithin2hours.Seethe
nextpageforinstructions.
3. Digits/Letters:Allowyoutotunetoachannelby
enteringchannelnumbers;pressENTERforfaster
tuning.Usenumbersandthe CANCEL keytoenterdigital
sub-channels.Alsouseforenteringinformationinto
menus.
Toselectletterswhennamingchannels,repeatedly
presstheassociatednumberkey.Thefollowing
specialcharactersareavailablewiththe1and0keys:
1 !&blankspace
0 / * -
4. /CANCEL (SUB-CHANNEL/CANCEL):Whenenteringdigital
channelnumbers,addsaseparatorbetweenmain
andsub-channelnumbers.ClearsFAVandsome
menuentries.
5. POWER:TurnsTVpoweronandoff.
6. QV (QuickView):Switchesbetweenthecurrent
channelandthelastchannelviewed.
7. MUTE:TurnsTVsoundofforon.
8. SPLIT:TurnsSplitScreenmodeonandoff.
9. VOL / (Volume Up/Down):Changessoundlevel.
10. CH/PAGE / (Channel or Page Up/Down):Scans
upordownthroughmemorizedchannels.Pagesup
anddownthroughscreenswhenusedwiththeTV
GuideOnScreensystemorChannelView.
11 FAV (Favorites):Scansthroughmemorizedlistsof
favoritechannels.SeeChannelMenuinchapter5,
TVMenuSettings,formoreinformation.
12. FORMAT:ChangestheshapeandsizeofthemainTV
picture.WheninSplitScreenmode,changesthe
sizeofthesplitimageswhilemaintainingtheiraspect
ratios.
13. INPUT:DisplaystheInput Selectionmenufromwhich
youcanselectaninputsourcetoview,suchasan
antennainput(ANT 1/2)oraconnecteddevice.
14. (Adjust Up/down/Left/Right):Navigate
menusandchangesettings.
15. ENTER:Selectsachannelnumberormenuitem.
16. GUIDE: DisplaysorremovesChannelViewchannellisting
forANT 1andANT 2.WiththeTVGuideOnScreen
systemenabled,launchesTVGuideOnScreen.
DisplaysDVDdiscortopmenuforaNetCommand-
controlledDVDplayer.
17. INFO:Displaysanon-screensummaryofthecurrent
deviceinuseandanybroadcastinformationavailable,
includingcurrentV-Chipinformation.Seechapter4,
TVOperationandFeatures,fordetails.
18. AUDIO:Selectsindividualaudiosettingsforadjustment.
19. VIDEO:Selectsindividualvideosettingsforadjustment.
20. MENU:DisplaysthemainTVmenuusingthe
on-screenmenusystem.Whenasub-menuisopen,
backsuponelevel.
21. EXIT:ClosesallTVon-screenmenusanddisplaysand
returnstonormalTVviewing.
22. F1F4
For devices under NetCommand control:Perform
NetCommandLearningtoassignfunctionstothe
F1F4keys.
For devices operating independently of
NetCommand:TheF1F4keysworkliketheA,B,C,
Dbuttonsonsomecableboxes,satellitereceivers,
andDVDplayers.Programtheremotecontrolfor
yourequipmentandtestthekeys.SeeAppendixD,
ProgrammingtheRemoteControl.
24. (PAUSE): FreezesabroadcastTVpicturewhenno
SplitScreenimageisdisplayed.WhenSplitScreenis
displayed,freezesthesub-picture.Seebelowforuse
withrecordablemedia.
Record/Playback Keys
Toenabletherecordingandplaybackfunctions:
programtheremoteforyourVCRorDVDplayer/
recorderandsettheslideswitchtoVCRorDVD.
PerformNetCommandLearningforthedevice.
Seechapter6,NetCommandOperations,forcontrol
ofIEEE1394devices.
23. (RECORD):RecordswithaVCRorDVDrecorder.
24. (PAUSE): PausesaVCRorDVD.Seeaboveforuse
duringTVviewing.
25. (STOP):StopsplayofaVCRorDVD.
26. (REVERSE): RewindsaVCR.Reversescansa DVD.
27. (PLAY):PlaysaVCRorDVD.
28. (FAST FORWARD):FastforwardsaVCR.Forward
scansaDVD.
Note: TheTVsremotecontrolcanoperateother
audio/videodevices.
Seechapter3,TVSetup,forNetCommand
Learningofdevicekeys.
SeeAppendixD,ProgrammingtheRemote
Controlforinstructionsonprogramming.
ForcontrolofIEEE1394devices,seechapter6.
Chapter 4. TV Operation and Features 49
22
28
10
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
24 23
26 27
25
16
17
11
12
13
14
15
5
6
18
19
20
21
Figure 1. Remote Control Overview
Sleep Timer
Setting the Sleep Timer
1. PressSLEEPontheremotecontrol.
2. PressSLEEPadditionaltimestoincreasethetimein
30-minuteincrementsuptothemaximumof120
minutes.
3. PressEXITorwaitfivesecondswithoutpressingany
buttonsforthemessagetodisappear.
4. PressSLEEPtoviewthetimeremainingbeforethesleep
timerturnsofftheTV.
Cancelling the Sleep Timer
1. PressSLEEPtodisplaytheon-screenmessage.
2. PressSLEEPrepeatedlyuntilOFF isdisplayed.
Note: Afterfvesecondsofinactivity,themessagebox
willdisappear.
Resetting the Remote Control
IftheslideswitchissettoTVandtheTVdoesnotrespond
properly,dothefollowingtoresettheremotecontrol.
1. PressandholdPOWERforseveralsecondsuntilthe
buttonblinkstwiceandgoesoff.
2. ReleasethePOWERbutton.
3. Presskeys0 0 9 3 5andthePOWERbuttonwillblink
twicewhenyoufinishenteringthecode.Whileenter-
ingthecode,pauseforamomentbetweeneachkey
presstoensureitisrecognized.
FAV (Favorite Channels)
ForuseoftheFAVfeaturewiththeremotecontrol,see
chapter5,TVMenuSettings,andtheexplanationofthe
Channelmenu.
Remote Control, continued
Choosing a Program Source
NOTE: Ifyouronlyviewingsourcesareconnectedtothe
ANT 1andANT 2antennajacks,youcanswitch
inputswithouttheInputSelectionmenu.Press
INPUTtoswitchbetweenANT 1andANT 2.To
verifywhichisthecurrentsourcewhilewatching
TV,pressINFOtoseetheon-screenstatusdisplay.
Selecting from Multiple Sources: The Input
Selection Menu
TheInputSelectionmenuallowsyoutoselectaninputto
watchontheTV.Thecurrentinputappearsasagold-
coloredicon.
1. PressINPUTontheTVsremotecontroltodisplaythe
InputSelectionmenu(Figure2).
2. Toselectadifferentinput,press ontheTVs
remotecontroltomovethehighlightthroughiconsin
theinputsection.
3. PressENTERtoswitchtothedeviceandclosethemenu.
More About the Input Selection Menu
Toassignmeaningfullabelstotheicons,suchas
VCRorDVD,seetheInputNamesectionof
chapter5,TVMenuSettings.
Torearrangetheicons,seetheIconOrdersectionof
chapter5,TVMenuSettings.
TousewithNetCommand-controlleddevices,includ-
ingIEEE1394/DTVLinkdevices,seeadditionalinfor-
mationinchapter6,NetCommandOperations.

Input Section Audio Section
Figure 2. Input Selection menu. See chapter 6,
NetCommand Functions, for use of the Audio section.
withthemajorchannelandsub-channels(orbitstreams).
Analogchannelinformationisdisplayedassent.
Note: Iflimiteddataisshownornoprogramdataap-
pears,itisbecausethebroadcasterisnotsending
theinformation. This is not a defect of your TV.
Using ChannelView
Feature Instructions
Viewlistingswhileviewing
ANT 1orANT 2.
PressGUIDE.
Scanthroughmemorized
channelsonebyone.
Press or .
Scanquicklythroughmemo-
rizedchannels.
PressPAGE / .
Viewdetailedinformationfor
digitalchannels.
Press or tohighlight
achannelandpress .
Returntoviewingbasiclist-
ingsinformation
Press .

Figure 3. ChannelView screen, current programs. Use
to exchange displays for current and future programs.

Figure 4. ChannelView screen, future programs on the
selected channel (digital channels only)
IMPORTANT
To receive ChannelView updates: Set the
Energy Mode to Fast Power On and leave the
TV powered off for a while each day. If the TV
loses power, program listings will be lost until
the next update.
ChannelView Channel Listings
ChannelViewprovideslistings,assentbybroadcast-
ers,formemorizedchannelsonANT 1orANT 2.
ChannelViewisavailable
foranantennainputnotassignedtotheTVGuide
OnScreensystem.
WhentheTVGuideOnScreensystemisdisabled.
ChannelsaremarkedwitheitheraDfordigitalchannels
oranAforanalogchannels.Digitalchannelsareshown
Status Display
Theon-screenstatusdisplayappearswhenyouturnon
theTV,changeinputs,changechannels,orpresstheINFO
buttonontheremotecontrol.Themostcommondisplays
areshownbelow.Seldomorneverdoallthestatusindi-
catorsappearatthesametime.
Analog Program
1. SourceAntennaorInput
2. AnalogChannelbeingreceived(Ifanantenna
source)
3. ChannelName(ifornamedintheChannelmenu)
4. SignalTypeBeingReceived.Possible:
FromANT-1, ANT-2,orINPUTjacks:480i
FromCOMPONENTjacks:480i,480p,720p,
1080i
5. ScreenFormatinuse
Possible:
Analog480i/480psignals:Standard,Expand,
Zoom,Stretch,StretchPlus,Narrow
720p/1080isignals:Standard,WideExpand
6. Stereoand/orSAPbeingbroadcast.InSplitScreen
mode,thespeakericonisoneithertheleftorright
toindicatethesoundsource.
7. V-ChipRatings
8. ChannelisincurrentFAVbank(FAVbank2)
9. DayandTime
Ant-1 3 XXXX XXXXXXXXXX ANT-1 3
480i Standard
Stereo SAP
TV-PG DLSV Copy Once
FAV2
Monday 11:00 AM
Sleep: 30
MUTE
11
3 2
6
7
1
8 9
10
12
4 5
13
14
10. SleepTimerremainingtime
11. SplitScreenpicturesourceandchannel
12. AudioMuteon
13. Copy-ProtectionStatus.Possible:
CopyOnce
CopyNever
14. Programname(ifprovidedbyTVGuideOnScreen)
Digital Program
1. DigitalMajorandSub-ChannelNumber
2. DigitalChannelName(onlyifbroadcast)
3. SignalTypeBeingReceived
Possible:SD4:3,SD16:9,HD
4. ScreenFormatinUse
Possible:
SD4:3:Standard,Expand,Zoom,Stretch,Stretch
Plus,Narrow
SD16:9orHD16:9:Standard,WideExpand
5. Language(s)beingbroadcast
6. ProgramName(ifbroadcast)orprovidedbyTV
GuideOnScreen
CopyOnce:Programcanberecorded
CopyNever[RetentionPeriod]:Programcannever
berecorded;maydisplayprogramretentionperiod
Ant-1 42-1 XXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
HD Standard
English
TV-PG DLSV Copy Never: 3 Days
FAV2
Monday 11:00 AM
Sleep: 30
6
7
1
3
4
5
2
Digital IEEE 1394 Device
1. StatusofD-VHSVCRorIEEE1394device
2. CounterofD-VHSVCR
3. Specialmessageline(showsonlywhenaspecial
messageisneeded;maybeseenwithanalog
signals)
CopyOnce:Programcanberecorded
CopyNoMore:Programcanneverberecorded;
programmaybemovable.
CopyNever[RetentionPeriod]:Programcannever
berecorded;maydisplayprogramretentionperiod
DVCR
HD Standard
English
TV-PG DLSV Copy No More
Play 01:20:15
Monday 11:00 AM
Sleep: 30
Special Message Line
1
3
2
4
Split Screen
SplitScreenallowsyoutoviewpicturesfromtwodifferent
sourcesatthesametime.SplitScreenisavailablewhen
youhavevideosourcesconnectedtotheTVinadditionto
connectionsonANT 1orANT 2.
Operation
IMPORTANT
SplitScreenisunavailableifyouronly
inputs are ANT 1 and ANT 2.
A1080psignalfromanHDMIjackoraper-
sonal computer can be viewed only as the
main picture.
Split Screen Operations Instructions
TurnSplitScreenonoroff PressSPLIT.
Switchthesoundsourcebetweenmain
andsub-pictures.
Press or .Thespeakericonappearsbrieflytoindicatethe
soundsourceaseitherthemainpicture(left)orsub-picture
(right).Thesoundsourceisthesideyoucancontrolwiththe
remotecontrol.
Checkwhichpictureisthesoundsource.
PressINFO.Thespeakericonappearsintheinformationdisplaytoindi-
catethesoundsource.
Changethesourceofthesub-picture.
1. Press tomakethesub-picturethesoundsource.
2. PressINPUTandmovethehighlighttotheiconfortheinputyouwish
toviewasthesub-picture(seefigure6).
3. PressENTERtomakethechange.
Grayed-outinputiconsareunavailableasSplitScreensourcesorwith
thecurrentsource.
Changesub-picturechannel(whenthe
inputsourceisANT 1, ANT 2,ora
NetCommand-controlledcableboxor
satellitereceiver).
Press tomakethesub-picturethesoundsourcethenpressCH / .
Freezeorunfreezethesub-picture.
Press (PAUSE).Press againtoreturntonormalmovingvideo.
Changethesizeofthemainandsub-
pictures.
RepeatedlypressFORMATtocyclethroughpicturesizes.Seethefollow-
ingpageforsampledisplays.
Makethesubpicturefillthescreen.
1. Press tomakethesub-picturethesoundsource.
2. PressSPLITtocloseSplitScreenmode.
Figure 5. Change the source of the sub-picture with the
Split Screen Input Selection menu.
Choice of Split Screen
sub-Picture Sources
SPLIT appears under the
Video icon to distinguish
this menu from the Input
Selection menu.
TV Inputs for Split Screen
TheavailableSplitScreenpicturesourcesarelistedbelow.
Display choices. Press the FORMAT key
repeatedly while in Split Screen mode to
view different displays.
Split Screen Displays
Sub-Picture
Main
Picture
ANT 1 ANT 2 INPUT COMPONENT
HDMI
(no 1080p)
HDMI
(1080p)
IEEE 1394
ANT 1
ANT 2
INPUT *
COMPONENT **
HDMI (no 1080p)
HDMI (1080p)
PC-DVI
IEEE 1394
* Onlywhenmainpictureandsub-picturearefromdifferentINPUTjacks.
** Onlywhenmainpictureandsub-picturearefromdifferentCOMPONENTjacks.
HDMI1080pandPC-DVIappearasmainpictureintheSplitScreencombinationsmarkedinthesecond
rowofscreensaboveunderSplitScreenDisplays.
Check marks indicate combinations of picture sources you can view in Split Screen mode.
16:9 Main
Picture
16:9 Main
Picture
16:9 Main
Picture
16:9 Main
Picture
16:9 Main
Picture
16:9 Main
Picture
4:3
Sub-Picture
4:3
Sub-Picture
4:3
Sub-Picture
4:3 Main
Picture
4:3 Main Picture
4:3 Main
Picture
16:9 Sub-
Picture
16:9 Sub-
Picture
16:9 Sub-
Picture
4:3 Main
Picture
4:3 Main Picture
4:3 Main
Picture
4:3
Sub-Picture
4:3
Sub-Picture
4:3
Sub-Picture
16:9 Sub-
Picture
16:9 Sub-
Picture
16:9 Sub-
Picture
16:9 Main Picture/
4:3 Sub-Picture
16:9 Main Picture/
16:9 Sub-Picture
4:3 Main Picture/
4:3 Sub-Picture
4:3 Main Picture/
16:9 Sub-Picture

TV Signals and Display Formats
ThisisawidescreenTV,alsoknownasa16:9TV.This
shapereflectsthenewtypesofimagesavailablefrom
HDTVandmanyDVDs.Therearestillmanyolderstyle
narrow-screenimages(called4:3aspectratio)youwill
encounter.Whilethereisnoperfectsolutionfordis-
playingasquarish,narrowerimageonawidescreen,
Mitsubishioffersseveraldisplayformatsfromwhichyou
canchoose.
PressFORMATontheTVremotecontroltocyclethroughthe
availabledisplayformats.Thelast-usedformatforeach
deviceisusedwhenyoureturntothatdevice.
Note:
OnlystandardformatisavailableforSplitScreen.
PCformatsvarydependingonthePCsignal.
For1080psignalsfromanHDMIinput,seeCom-
puterDisplayFormatsinchapter7,UsingtheTV
withaPersonalComputer.
Signal Definitions
480i Signals:Traditionalanaloginterlacedsignalsfrom
orthroughANT-1and2, INPUT 13, COMPONENT
andHDMIjacks.
480pSignals:Progressive-scanDVDsignalsonCOM-
PONENTandHDMIjacks.
720p and 1080i Signals:High-definitionsignalsreceived
throughCOMPONENTandHDMIjacks.These
signalsarealways16:9(widescreen).
SD 4:3:Standard-definitionnarrow-screenformatsignals
fromdigitalchannelsandIEEE1394devices.
SD 16:9: Standard-definitionwidescreenformatsignals
fromdigitalchannelsandIEEE1394devices.
HD: High-definitionwide-screenformatsignalsfromdigital
channelsandIEEE-1394devices.Thesesignalsarealways
16:9(widescreen).
DVD Definitions
Anamorphic (or Enhanced for WideScreen TV)
TheseDVDsarerecordedinaspecialwaytoproperly
showwidescreenimageson16:9TVsetsusingthe
Standardformatmode.Thisistherecommendedviewing
choice.
Non-Anamorphic (or 4:3, 1:33:1, Letter Box, or Full
Screen)
TheseDVDsarerecordedforusewithtraditionally
shaped,squarishTVs.Theymaybefullscreen(4:3or
1:33:1)whichcropsmoviestofitthenarrowTV,orletter
box,whichaddsblacktopandbottombars.
ThisinformationmaybelistedontheDVDcase.Some
DVDssupportbothtypesofrecordings.
TV Display Format Definitions
Standard: Thisisthefull-screenformat.HDTVsignals
usethisformat.Thisformatisusefulfordisplaying
AnamorphicDVDsthathave1.78:1or1.85:1aspect
ratios.AnamorphicDVDsthathavea2.35:1aspectratio
aredisplayedwithblackbarsatthetopandbottom,but
showtheentireimagecorrectly.Narrow(4:3)images
arestretchedevenlyfromsidetoside.Availableforall
signals.
Expand:Thisenlargesthepicturetofillthescreen,crop-
pingoffsomeoftheimageatthetopandbottom.This
isusefulforreducingtheletterboxtopandbottombars
ofnon-anamorphicDVDimages.Availablefor480i,480p,
anddigitalSD4:3signalsonly.
Zoom: Thisenlargesthepicture,croppingoffsomeof
theimageateachsideandtopandbottom.Thisisuseful
forremovingorreducingtheblacktopandbottombars
onanamorphicDVDswitha2.35:1aspectratio.Available
for480i,480p,andSD4:3signalsonly.
Stretch:Thisformatstretchesanarrow(4:3)image
acrossthescreen;thereislessstretchinthecenterthan
atthesides,however.Thisallowstheentirenarrowimage
tobedisplayedacrossthescreenwithlessdistortionthan
isseenintheStandardformat.Availablefor480i,480p,
andSD4:3signalsonly.
Stretch Plus: Similartostretchmode,buttominimize
distortionsontheside,thepictureisexpandedtocropoff
portionsofthetopandbottom.Exceptwhendisplaying
menusorSplitScreen,press toadjustthepositionof
thepicturevertically.Availablefor480i,480p,andSD4:3
signalsonly.
Narrow: Thisformatdisplaysnarrow(4:3)imagesintheir
originalshape,andaddsstationaryblacksidebarstofill
thescreen.Availablefor480i,480p,andSD4:3signals
only.
Wide Expand: Enlargesthepicture,croppingsomeof
theimageonbothsides.ThisExpandformatisuseful
toremoveorreduceblacksidebarsaddedtonarrow
imagesthatareconvertedto16:9signalsfordigital
broadcast.Availablefor1080i,720p,digitalSD16:9and
digitalHDsignals.
Note: Allhigh-defnitionchannelssendwidescreen(16:9)
signals,butnotallprogrammingsentonthese
channelswascreatedforthisformat.Asaresult,
thebroadcastermustconvertsuchprogramming
forbroadcast,andmaystretchtheimageoradd
sidebarstofllthewidescreenarea.
ORIGINAL SIGNAL
Non-anamorph|c or SD 4:3
ORIGINAL SIGNAL
Anamorph|c DVD
TV D|sp|ay
Standard
(not recommended, distortedj
Stretch
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i
(recommended for standard broadcastj
Standard
(recommendedj
TV D|sp|ay
Narrow
Stretch Plus
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i
(recommended for standard broadcastj
Standard
Original HD or SD
16:9, 720p or 1080i
(with side bars in broadcastj
Expand
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i

Zoom
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i
Expand
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i
Zoom
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i
(recommended for anamorphic 2.35:1j
Stretch
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i
Stretch Plus
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i
Narrow
not available for
HD, SD 16:9 or
analog 720p, 1080i
Wide Expand
available only for
digital SD 16:9, HD,
analog 1080i or 720p
(recommended to remove side barsj
(recommended for letterboxedj
TV Display Formats
Seedescriptionsontheprecedingpage.
Memory Card Playback
Memory Card Reader
(models WD-57732, WD-65732, WD-73732)
Inserting a memory card
1. Insertacardintoamatchingcardslotonthefrontof
theTV.Besuretousethecorrectcardslot.Seethe
tablebelow.Normallythelabelsideshouldbeup,but
ifthecarddoesnotfit,tryturningthecardoverand
insertagain.Whenproperlyinserted,thelightnext
totheslotwilllightupandtheTVwillautomatically
switchtothecarddisplay.Cardsupto1GB,witha
fileformatofFAT16(blocksize=1024or2048)are
supported.
CARD 1
SmartMedia
CARD 2
MultiMediaCard
SecureDigital(SD)
CARD 3
CompactFlash(TypesIandII)
Microdrive
CARD 4
MemoryStickPRO
MemoryStick
2. Next,theMediaDialogbox(figure6)automatically
displays.UsetheAUDIOkeytoswitchtoMP3orWMA
audioplaylistsetuporusetheVIDEOkeytoswitchto
JPEGslideshowsetup.
Do not pull the memory card out while it is playing.
Figure 6. Media
dialog box, slide
show mode. A
similar dialog box
appears when in
audio mode.
3. Ontheremotecontrol,press:

Starttheslideshoworplayaudio.
GUIDE DisplaytheJPEGThumbnailmenu(seefigure7)
orAudiotrackplaylist(seefigure8)
FORMAT WhenMediaDialogBoxisopen,displaythe
MediaSetupmenu(seefigure9).
Whenscreenisblank,displaytheMediaDialog
Box(seefigure6).
VIDEO Switchfromaudiomodetoslideshowmode.
AUDIO Switchfromslideshowmodetoaudiomode.
INFO Displayon-screenstatusforthememorycard.
INPUT OpentheInputSelectionmenutoselectadif-
ferentdevicetowatch.
Viewing Pictures
Using the Picture Thumbnail Menu
1. PressGUIDEontheremotecontroltodisplaytheJPEG
pictureThumbnailmenu.Seefigure7.
2. Press tomovethehighlighttodifferent
images;CH / changespagesoftheThumbnail
menu.Use togotothepreviousslideand to
gotothenextslide.
3. PressFORMATtorotatetheselectedimage90(pressing
FORMATfourtimesrotatestheimagecompletelyaround
totheoriginalposition).
4. Press tobeginplaybackoftheslideshowstarting
withtheselectedimage.
Figure 7. JPEG Thumbnails
Keys for JPEG Picture Slide Show
Beginorresumeslideshowplayback
Pauseorresumeplaybackwhileintheauto-
maticadvancemode.
Advancetothenextslide.
Gotothepreviousslide.
FORMAT Singlepressrotatestheslide90clockwise.
Multiplepressescontinuetorotatetheslide.
Stopslideshow,displaymediadialogbox.
Compatible Picture Files (JPEG Pictures up to 1 GB)
Stillimagesrecordedondigitalcamerasusingthe
ExchangeableImageFileFormat,version2.1(EXIF2.1)
standardfordigitalstillcamerasandDesignRulesfor
CameraFileSystemsversion1.0(DCF1.0)
Someimagesopenedandresavedonacomputermay
notplaybackormaynotbeabletodisplayapicturein
thethumbnaillistbecausethecomputerprogramthat
openedandresavedtheimageschangedthefiletoan
incompatibleformat.
Standarddigitalimageswithamaximumsize5mega-
pixelsforeachimage,or2560x1920pixels.Pictures
Warning: Some memory cards available on the market are not properly certified to the card specifications noted and cannot
be used by the card reader. If you experience problems reading your file, please transfer your files to a properly certified card.
Playing Audio
Using the Audio Playlist Menu
1. PressGUIDEtodisplaythePlaylistmenu.
2. Press toselectdifferenttracks;CH /
changespagesofthePlaylist.Use togotothe
firsttrackonthepageand togotothelasttrack
onthepage.
3. Press tobeginplayback.Thesongcurrently
playingishighlighted.
Figure 8. Audio Playlist
Keys for MP3 or WMA Audio Playback
Beginorresumeplaylistplayback.
Pauseorresumeplayback.
Advancetothenexttrack/song.
Gototheprevioustrack/song.
Stopplaybackanddisplaymediadialogbox..
Compatible Audio Files (MP3 or WMA)
Filesrecordedwithsamplingratesof32kHz,44.1kHz
or48kHz.
Filesrecordedwithfixedbitrates
Filenameswith.mp3or.wmaextensions
NOTE:
DuringMP3audioplayback,audiofromthe
cardissenttotheA/Vreceiverasanalogaudio.
Digitaloutisnotavailable.
Repetitivenoisemaybepresentwhenplaying
WMAdigitalaudiofilesfrommemorycards.
Media Setup Menu
IntheMediasetupmenuyoucanadjusttheslideshow
display,frequency,orinterval,ortheplaylistfrequency.
TodisplaytheMediaSetupmenu,pressMENUtwicefrom
ablankscreentofirstdisplaytheMediaDialogbox.Next
pressFORMAT.PressFORMATagaintoclosetheMediaSetup
menu.PressMENUontheremotecontroltoredisplaythe
MediaDialogBox.
JPEG Picture Slide Show Setup
ForJPEGpictureslideshowplayback,selectAuto-
maticorManualadvance.Formanualoperation,
press orENTERtoadvancetothenextslide.
Forautomaticadvance,selectthefrequencyor
numberoftimestoshowthecompleteslideshow,
Once,TwiceorContinuously.
Forautomaticadvance,selecttheintervaltimeeach
slideisshown,forexample,fiveseconds,or30
seconds
MP3 or WMA Audio Playlist Setup
Selectthefrequencyornumberoftimestoplaythecom-
pleteplaylist.Once,TwiceorContinuously.
Figure 9. Media Setup menu
IMPORTANT
JPEG images cannot be edited through
the TV. When editing on a personal com-
puter, make name changes only to avoid
file incompatibility.
MP3 files must have at least a 32-kHz
sampling rate.
Memory Card Playback, continued
willbescaledtotheTVdisplay.Somepicturesmay
becroppedtofit.
Fullpathfilenamescanbenolongerthan50char-
actersandmustendina.jpgextension.Notall50
characterswilldisplay.
Imagesstoredoncardslargerthan256MBcantakea
longerinitialtimetodisplay.
5
TV Menu Settings
3D Graphical Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NetCommand Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Channel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Captions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Parental Lock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Setting a Pass Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Lock TV by Time and Front-Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Rating Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Bypassing the Ratings Lock and Lock by Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
V-Chip Signal Information
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Audio/Video Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Audio Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Video Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
60 Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings
Menu Screens
Apicture(icon)ishighlightedonthemenu
screenwhenselectedwiththedirectional
arrows .Youmaythenmake
changeswithinthemenuoraccesssub-
menus,ifavailable.
Youcanalsoopensub-menusfroma
button.Sometimeswhenyouselecta
button,anautomaticfunctionbegins.
3D Graphical Menu System
YourTVhasMitsubishisexclusive3DGraphical on-screenoperatingsystem,whichprovideson-screen
informationformenuchoicesandchangesusingtheTVsremotecontrol.
The systemincludesthefollowingspecialfea-
tures:
Thecurrentlyselectediconorbuttonishighlighted
withayellowoutline;thetextcolorisyellow.
On-screeninstructions,showninthemessagelineat
thebottomofthemenu,providefeatureselectionand
adjustmentinformation.
Someon-screenmenuoptionsmustbesetbefore
otheroptionsareavailable.
Remote Control Buttons
Thefollowingbuttonsontheremotecontrolhelpyounavigatewithinthe
system:
Key Function
1 MENU
DisplayorclosetheMainmenuormoveback
onemenuscreenatatime.
2 EXIT CloseallmenusandreturntoTVviewing.
3

(AdjustLeft/RightKeys)
toselectamenuitemtochange.
4

(AdjustUp/DownKeys)
tochangethesettings.
toscrollthroughpre-settext-boxentries.
5
ENTER
Openamenu,startanautomaticfunction,or
selectacheckbox.
6
Numbers,Letters
Entercustomnamesinsometextboxes.
7
CANCEL
Clearasettingorstopanautomaticfunction.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
Chapter 5. TV Menu Settings 61
Setup
Seechapter3,TVSetup,foruseoftheSetup
menu.
SelectEnglishorSpanishformenusand
on-screendisplays.
Memorizetheavailablechannelsforthe
antennaorcableserviceconnectedtothe
ANT 1andANT 2jacks.
SettheTVsinternalclockeithermanually
orhavetheTVsettheclockautomatically.
SettheTVTimertoturnontheTVauto-
maticallyatadesignatedtime.
Settheenergymodeforpowerconsump-
tionwhentheTVispoweredoff.
TurnoffDemoMode.
ViewtheTVssoftwareversion.
NetCommand
Seechapter3,TVSetup,formoreonuseof
theNetCommandmenu.
Seeareviewlistofallconnectionstothe
TV.
SetupTVGuideOnScreenormake
changestothesetup.
Assignmeaningfulnamestotheinputicons
intheInputSelectionmenu.
ChangetheorderoficonsintheInput
Selectionmenu.
PerformNetCommandLearningsetup.
AssociateA/Vreceiverinputswithdevices
toenableautomaticaudioswitching.
Record
SetupaNetCommand-controlledrecord-
ing.
Viewalistofscheduledrecordings.
Setthedefaultdigitalrecordingdevice.
Selectanamorphicorcroppedformatfor
analogrecordings.
Main Menu
PressMENUontheremotecontroltoopentheMainmenu,
figure1.Seebelowforanoverviewoftheoptionsavailable
throughtheMainmenu.
Figure 1. Main menu.
Channel
EditchannelsfortheANT 1andANT 2
inputs.
Manuallyaddordeletechannelsfrom
memory,nameanalogchannels,oradd
yourfavoritechannelstoaFAV(Favorites)
list.
Viewsignalstrengthofacurrentlytuned
digitalchannel.
Captions
Displayclosedcaptions(ifsentbythe
broadcaster).
Selectsettingsforanalogordigitalcap-
tions.
Parental Lock
Blockorallowprogrammingbasedon
ratingsignalssentbythebroadcaststation.
LocktheTVbytime.
Lockthefront-panelbuttons.
Audio/Video
ResetaselectedinputsA/Vmemorytothe
originalfactorysettings.
Customizeindividualaudioandvideoset-
tings.
Displayabluescreenwhenviewinga
devicewithnovideosignalorapoorvideo
signal.
Enable/disableFilmMode.
TurntheTVspeakersonoroff.
Setup Menu
Seechapter3,TVSetup,foruseoftheSetupmenu.
NetCommand Menu
Thefeaturesdescribedinthissectionareavailableevenif
youhavenotperformedNetCommandsetup.Seechapter
3,TVSetup,foroptionsavailableforNetCommand-
controlleddevices.
Review TV Connections
(no NetCommand setup required)
Press tohighlightReviewandpressENTERto
displaytheReviewscreen(seefigure2).
Figure 2. The Review screen lists all TV connections.
IEEE 1394 inputs are listed separately on the right.
Input Name Menu
UsetheInputNamemenutoassignusefullabelstothe
TVinputsthatappearintheInputSelectionmenu.See
figures3and4.Thecurrentviewingdeviceandany
unusedinputsappeargrayedoutandunselectableinthe
InputNamemenu.
Icon for the Input Name menu Icon for the Icon Order menu
Figure 3. The Input Name menu and Icon Order menu are
accessible through the NetCommand menu.
Figure 4. Input Name menu
To rename an input
1. Ifyouarecurrentlywatchingtheinputyouwishto
rename,firstchangetoanotherinput.Todoso,press
INPUTtoopentheInputSelectionmenu,highlightadif-
ferentinput,andpressENTER.
2. WiththeInputNamemenudisplayed,press to
movethehighlighttotheboxfortheinputyouwishto
rename.
3. Press toselectfromthefollowinglist.
Cable Box Game
Camcorder HD Disc
DVD Satellite
DVD2 VCR
DVR(digitalvideo
recorder,recordableDVD)
OnlyoneVCRlabelisavailable,soIfyouhavea
secondVCRconnected,leavethenameasthedefault
name.
IMPORTANT
It is possible to use the same name for more
than one input. To avoid confusion, be sure
to use different names for each input.
To Replace One Device with Another on an Input Jack
1. Disconnectthedeviceyouwishtoremovefromthe
TV.
2. Connectthenewdevicetothevacatedjack.
3. OpentheInputNamemenufromtheNetCommand
menu.
4. Selectadevicenamefromthelistfortheinput.
5. OpentheReviewscreenandconfirmthechange.
To Remove the Icon for an HDMI Device
WhenyoudisconnectanHDMIdevice,theiconremainsin
theInputSelectionmenuuntilyouchoosetoremoveit.
1. IntheInputNamemenu(seefigure4),highlightthe
boxforthedisconnectedHDMIinput.
2. Press toselectOff.
3. PressMENUtoreturntotheNetCommandmenuor
pressEXITtocloseallmenus.
Icon Order Menu
TheIconOrdermenuallowsyoutorearrangethedevice
iconsthatappearintheInputSelectionmenu.Change
thesequencetoputfrequentlyusediconsatthestartof
thelist.Seefigures3and5.
To change the icon order
1. Press tohighlighttheicontobemovedand
thenpressENTER.
2. Press todragtheicontothedesiredposi-
tion.PressENTERtosetthenewposition.
Figure 5. Icon Order menu
Channel Menu
Settings for the Channel
Number Shown
FAV Memory
Banks
Signal-Strength
(digital channels only)
Figure 6. Channel menu
Antenna (Channel Menu)
Selecteither1(ANT 1 MAIN)or2(ANT 2 AUX)asthe
antennasourceforthechannelsyouwishtoedit.
Channel (Channel Menu)
Selecttheaffectedchannelnumber(showninthe
Channelbox)inanyofthreeways:
PressCH / toselectfromchannelsalreadyin
memory.Ifyoualsowishtotunetothechannel,press
ENTER.
Highlightthechannelboxandpress tomove
throughallchannelnumbers,oneatatime.Ifyou
alsowishtotunetothechannel,pressENTER.
Highlightthechannelbox,enterthenumberdirectly,
andpressENTER.Notethatwiththismethod,youmust
pressENTERforthescreentodisplaysettingsforthe
selectedchannel.
Channelnumberscanbeonepart,analogordigital(up
tofivedigitslong),ortwopartfordigitalchannels.Fora
two-partdigitalchannel,press
CANCEL ontheremoteto
enteraseparatorafterthefirst,second,orthirdnumber,
dependingonthebroadcasterschannelinformation.
Fordigitalchannels,whenthebroadcasterhassenta
virtualchannelnumber,thevirtualchannelnumberis
showninthetextboxandtheoriginalphysicaldigital
channelisshownbelowonscreenasareference.One
originalchannelnumbercanbeassociatedwithseveral
differentvirtualchannels.
Memory (Channel Menu)
Aftertheavailablechannelshavebeenmemorizedwith
Memorize ChannelsontheSetupmenu,youcanadd
weakerchannelsordeleteunwantedchannelsusingthis
option.Forexample,ifyouwishtoseeonlydigitalchan-
nelslisted,usethismenutodeleteanalogchannelsfrom
memory.
PressCH / toreviewthechannelsinmemory.Press
toselectAddedorDeletedforthechannelshownin
theChannelbox.
To Add a New Digital Channel
1. Inthechannelmenu,enterthephysicalchannel
numberintheChannelbox,includingthesub-chan-
nelnumber;press
CANCEL
(/CANCEL)andthenenterthe
sub-channelnumber.Ifnosub-channelisspecified,
press
CANCEL and1.
2. PressENTERtotunetothechannel.
3. HighlighttheAddedradiobutton.
Name
AnalogchannelsfromANT 1andANT 2canbenamed
withuptofourcharacters.Thenameyouenterherewill
appearontheTVscreenaspartoftheon-screenstatus
display.Digitalchannelsmayalreadybenamedifthe
broadcastersendstheinformation.
1. Pressanumberkeyrepeatedlytocyclethroughthe
charactersassociatedwiththekey.Youcanalsouse
tochangeahighlightedcharacter.
2. PressENTERtosettheletterandmovetothenextletter
position.PressCANCELtomovebackoneposition.
Note: WhentheTVGuideOnScreensystemisenabled,
thenamedisplayedisthenamesentbythebroad-
casterinsteadofthenameyouassign.
Signal Strength (Channel Menu)
Displaystheapproximatesignalstrengthofthecurrently
tuneddigitalchannel.Usethisindicatortohelpyouadjust
theantennadirectionforbestsignalreception.Thetaller
thebar,thestrongerthesignal.Thisindicatorappliesonly
todigitalchannels.
Toviewtheeffectsofantennaadjustmentsondigital
channels,tunetothedigitalchannelyouwishtomeasure
whileremaininginthismenu.Totunetoachannel,either:
Highlightthechannelbox,pressCH / or to
displaythedesiredchannelnumber,andpressENTER.
Enterthechannelnumberontheremotecontroland
pressENTER.
Terminology
Virtual Channel Number
Achannelnumberusedbyalocalbroadcastertohelp
youidentifytheirdigitalchannel.Usuallythisisassoci-
atedwiththeirtraditionalanalogchannelnumber.
Physical Digital Channel Number
Thechannelnumberofficiallyassignedtotheactual
broadcastfrequency.
FAV (Channel Menu)
TheFAVfeatureletsyoustoregroupsoffavoritechannels
inuptoninedifferentFAVmemorybanks.Forexample,
eachhouseholdmembercanstorefavoritechannelsin
theirownbankoryoucanstoregroupsofchannelsby
content,e.g.,news,sports,childrensprogramming,etc.
YoucanstorethesamechannelinmultipleFAVbanks.
FAV Setup Using the Channel Menu
Initial Setup of a FAV Bank and
Adding FAV Channels Using the
Menu
1. WiththeChannelmenudisplayed,selectachannelusingoneofthe
methodsdescribedontheprecedingpage,forexample,pressCH /
foramemorizedchannel.
2. Highlightthedesiredbank(FAV1FAV9)andpressENTERtocheckmarkthe
selectedFAVmemorybank.Thechannelnumberdisplayedhasnowbeen
addedtothecheckedFAVbank.
3. WiththeFAVbankstillhighlighted,pressCH / todisplaythenext
channelyouwishtoaddtotheFAVbank.
4. PressENTERtoaddacheckmarknexttothehighlightedFAVbank.
5. Repeatsteps24foradditionalchannelsandFAVbanks.
Removing FAV Channels Using the
Menu
1. WiththeChannelmenudisplayed,pressCH / todisplaythememo-
rizedchannelyouwishtoremove.
2. HighlightthedesiredFAVmemorybank(FAV1FAV9).
3. PressENTERtoremovethecheckmark.
Channel Menu, continued
OnceyouhaveaddedachanneltoFAVmemory,FAV
andthememorybanknumberappearunderthetuned
channelnumberontheTVscreen.Youcanaccessthe
FAVfeaturethroughtheChannelmenuoryoucanbypass
themenuanduseonlytheremotecontrol.
Using FAV Channels
Viewing FAV Banks 1. PresstheFAVkey.WaitfortheTVtotunetoachannelinthecurrentFAVbank.
2. PresstheFAVkeyrepeatedlytocyclethroughthechannelsavailableinthe
currentFAVbank.
Changing FAV Banks 1. PresstheFAVkey.WaitfortheTVtotunetoachannelinthecurrentFAVbank.
2. WhentuningiscompleteandwhiletheTVstatusdisplayisstillvisibleon
screen,pressthenumberkeyforthedesiredbank.
Note: Waitforthechannelchangetofnishbeforepressingthenumberkey.
Otherwise,theTVmayignoretheFAVnumber.
If No FAV Banks Are Set Up TheFAVkeyswitchestothepreviouslytunedchannel;worksliketheQVkey.
FAV Setup Using Only the Remote Control
Adding FAV Channels 1. WhilewatchingTV,tunetothechannelyouwanttoaddtothecurrentFAV
memorybank.Seetheinstructionsaboveifyouneedtofirstchangetoa
differentFAVbank.
2. PressandholdtheFAVbuttonforabout2seconds.WhenFAVandthe
memorybanknumberappearunderthechannelnumber,thechannelhas
beensuccessfullyadded.
Removing FAV Channels
Thisprocedureremovesthechannel
onlyfromtheselectedbankand
leavestheotherbanksunchanged.
1. WhilewatchingTV,presstheFAVbutton
2. WhiletheTVstatusdisplayisstillvisibleonscreen,pressthenumberkey
forthememorybank.
2. PresstheFAVbuttonrepeatedlyuntilyouseethedesiredchannel.
3. WhilethechannelnumberandFAVindicator(withcorrectbanknumber)
arestilldisplayedonthescreen,pressCANCEL.YoumustpressCANCEL
beforetheindicatordisappears.WhentheFAVindicatordisappears,the
channelhasbeensuccessfullyremoved.
Captions Menu
Foranalogchannels,broadcasterscansendeitherstan-
dardclosedcaptionsortextservice.Standardclosed
captionsfollowthedialogueofthecharactersonscreen
anddisplayinasmallsectionofthescreen.Text-service
closedcaptionsoftencontaininformationsuchasweather
ornewsandcoveralargeportionofthescreen.
Fordigitalchannels,broadcasterscansenduptosixdif-
ferentcaptioningselectionsorcansendanalogcaptions
thatarethesameasthosesentbytheanalogstation.
EachTVstationmaybroadcastonlyoneortwotypesof
captionsornoneatall.TheTVcannotdecodeclosed
captionsreceivedoncomponentorHDMIinputs.
Figure 7. Captions menu
IMPORTANT
When analog text closed captioning is
selected, a large black or gray box appears
on your TV screen if no signal is broadcast.
Analog Captions
TheTVcandisplayoneofthefollowingcaptionsfor
analogsources:
CC1, CC2, CC3, or CC4: standardclosed-caption
signals
Text1, Text2, Text3, or Text4:Text-servicesignals
On if mute:Closedcaptionsappearwhenaudiois
muted.Whenselected,pressMUTEontheTVremote
controltoturnon/offthestandardclosed-caption
signalCC1.
Off:Noclosedcaptions.
Background
Tomaketheanalogclosedcaptionseasiertoread,you
canchoosetodisplaythebackgroundcoloraseither
blackorgraybehindthetext.
Digital Captions
Thefollowingdisplayoptionsareavailablefordigital
sources:
Captions 16:Sentbybroadcaster.
On if Mute:Closedcaptionsaredisplayedwhen
audioismuted.Whenselected,pressMUTEontheTV
remotecontroltoturncaptioningon/off(Caption1).
Off: Noclosedcaptions.
Note:Fordigitalprograms,ifthebroadcasteris
sendingonlyanalogcaptionsconvertedtodigital
format,thentheanalogcaptionsettingsapply.
Appearance
Theclosed-captionsproviderselectsthedefaultoptions
whensendingdigitalclosedcaptions.SelectCustomto
overridedefaultsandcustomizetheappearanceofclosed
captions.Thesesettingsdonotapplytoanalogclosed
captioningconvertedtodigital.
Digital Settings
TheDigitalSettingsmenuallowsyoutocustomizethe
appearanceoftheclosedcaptionssentbythebroad-
caster.Digitalsettingsdonotapplytoanalogclosedcap-
tionsconvertedtodigital.
ToopentheDigitalSettingsmenu,select Customforthe
Appearanceoption.MovethehighlighttotheDigital
SettingsiconandpressENTER.
Figure 8. Closed Captions, Digital Settings sub-menu
Font
Theavailablefontoptionsareasfollows:
Default:Selectedbytheclosed-captionspro-
vider
Font 1:Monospacedfontwithserifs
Font 2:Proportionallyspacedfontwithserifs
Font 3:Monospacedfontwithoutserifs
Font 4:Proportionallyspacedwithoutserifs
Font 5:Casualfont
Font 6:Cursivefont
Font 7:Smallcapitals
Captions Menu, continued
Size
Selectthedesiredfontsize.Largeistherecommended
fontsize.
Color
Theavailablefontcolorsarelistedbelow.Textandback-
groundcannotbesettothesamecolor.
White Yellow
Black Green
Magenta Cyan
Red Blue
Background
Youcanchangethebackgroundcolortomakethedigital
closedcaptionseasiertoread.Theavailablebackground
colorsarelistedbelow.Textandbackgroundcannotbe
settothesamecolor.
White Yellow
Black Green
Magenta Cyan
Red Blue
IMPORTANT
Mitsubishi recommends you use contrasting
colors for captions and background.
Black translucent background combined
with a white font makes an easy-to-read
combination.
Use care when selecting custom colors. Your
choice may affect the readability of captions.
IMPORTANT
The content of captions is determined by the
broadcaster. If your captions show strange
characters, misspellings, or odd grammar, it is
not a malfunction of the TV.
Opacity (Font)
Youcancustomizethevisibilityofyourfontsusingthefol-
lowingsettings:
Translucent:TVprogramisdimmedbehindthetext
Transparent:InvisibletextrevealstheTVprogram
behind.
Opaque:SolidtextblocksviewoftheTVprogram
Flashing:Textflashesatintervals
Background Opacity
Youcancustomizethebackgroundfordigitalcaptions
usingthefollowingsettings:
Translucent:TVprogramisdimmedbehindthe
background
Transparent:Novisiblebackground
Opaque:SolidbackgroundcoversTVprogram
Flashing:Backgroundflashesatintervals
Parental Lock Menu
TheParentalLockmenugivesyoucontroloverthreedif-
ferenttypesofparentalcontrols.Youmustuseapass
codetoopenthismenutoenable/disablethelockoptions.
Thethreeparentalcontrolsavailableare:
Ratings (U.S. Ratings/Other Ratings)
V-Chiptechnologyletsyourestrictaccessto
programmingbasedonprogram-ratingsignalssentby
thebroadcaster.ForU.S.ratings,youcanalsosetthe
timeofdayfortheserestrictionstobeineffect.
Lock by Time
LetsyourestrictTVusebytimeofday.
Front Panel Lock
LetsyoudisablethecontrolsonthefrontoftheTV.
UsethisoptioniftherearesmallchildrenneartheTV
whomaybetemptedtopressthebuttons.
Access to
Ratings Menus
Lock TV by
Time
TV Front Panel
Lock On/Off
Figure 9. Parental Lock menu
Setting a Pass Code
Youarepromptedtoenterapasscodewheneveryou
selectParentalLockontheMainmenu.Tosetapass
codeforthefirsttime:
1. PressMENU,highlightParental Lock,thenpressENTER.
Ascreenpromptingyouforapasscodewilldisplay.
2. Inputafour-digitpasscodeusingthenumberkeyson
theremotecontrol.
PressCANCELtodeleteanumberandmove
backonespace.
PressMENUorEXITtoclosethemenuwithout
settingapasscode.
3. PressENTERtosetthepasscodejustinput.
Toresetthepasscode,seetheprocedureinAppendixA.
IMPORTANT
If you forget your four-digit pass code, see
Appendix A.
Lock TV by Time and Front-Panel Lock
Lock by Time (Parental Lock Menu)
Lock by TimeallowsyoutoblockalluseoftheTVduring
specifiedhours.Duringthelocktime,youmustuseyour
passcodetoviewtheTV.TolocktheTVbytime:
1. Press toselectOnorOffforLock by Time.
2. Press tomovetotheLock Timebox.
a. Withthehournumberhighlightedinyellow,press
repeatedlytochangethehourandassoci-
atedAM/PM indicator.Youcanalsojustpress
andholdtochangethehour.
b. PressENTERtomovethehighlighttotheminutes.
c. Withtheminutesnumberhighlightedinyellow,
press repeatedlytochangetheminutes.
Justpressandholdtomovequicklythroughthe
numbers.
d. Press tomovetotheUnlock Timeandsetthe
timeasdescribedabove.
NOTE: TomakeLock by Timeactive24hoursaday,set
LockandUnlocktothesametime.
Front Panel Lock (Parental Lock Menu)
Front Panel Lockletsyoudisablecontrolsonthefront
paneltopreventinadvertentchangestoTVsettings.
SelectOntodisablethebuttonsandselectOfftorestore
theiroperation.
Toreleasethefrontbuttonlockwithoutusingtheremote
control:
WhenEnergyModeissettoFast Power On,press
andholdtheMENUbuttononthefrontpanelforover
eightseconds.IftheTVison,amessagewilldisplay
confirmingreleaseoftheFrontPanelLock.
WhenEnergyModeissettoLow Power,pressPOWER
onthefrontpaneltoturnontheTV.Pressandholdthe
MENUbuttononthefrontpanelforovereightseconds.
Rating Menus
Theratingmenusallowyouto:
Turnratingrestrictionsonoroff
Changethepermittedratinglevel
Setthetimeofdaytoenforceratingrestrictions(U.S.
ratingsonly)
TheTVcomesfromthefactorywithpre-setU.S.V-Chip
ratingsandwiththeratinglocksturnedoff.Thepre-set
ratingsareTVratingTV-PGandmovieratingPG.Ifyou
turnonV-Chipblocking,thesepresetsallowonlypro-
gramsratedTV-PG/PGorloweruntilyouchangethe
ratinglevel.
Afterchangingthechannelordevice,theremaybeadelay
ofuptofivesecondsbeforetheratingrestrictionstake
effect.
U.S. Ratings Menu
UsethismenutoturnU.S.ratingrestrictionsonoroffand
tochangethepermittedratinglevels.
U.S. Restric-
tions On/Off
TV Rating and
Supplemental
Restrictions
Restriction
Hours
Movie Rating
TV Content
Categories
Figure 10. U.S. Ratings menu
1. HighlighttheU.S. Ratingsicon ontheParental
Lockmenu(seefigure9)andpressENTERtoopenthe
U.S.Ratingsmenu(seefigure10).
2. Press toselectOnorOff.
3. IfyouselectedOn,press tomovetotheTV Rating
box.
4. Press toselecttheTVratinglevelyouwantto
allow.
5. Press tomovetotheTVcontentcategories.This
sectionallowsyoutospecifycontentblockinginaddi-
tiontothatblockedbytheTVrating.Seethesection
onV-ChipratingsforanexplanationofTVcontent
categories.
Press tomovethehighlightamongthe
categories.
PressENTERtoaddorremoveacheckmarkfor
eachTVcontentcategoryyouwanttoblockor
unblock.
6. Press tomovetothePrograms Not Ratedbox.
PressENTERtoaddorremoveacheckmarkforblock-
ingorallowingprogramsthatarenotrated.
Note: Usecarewhenchoosingtoblockunratedpro-
gramming.Newsprogramsandemergencybul-
letinscarrytheNoneorNR(NotRated)V-Chip
signal,andtheyareblockedwiththisoptionac-
tive.
7. Press tomovetotheMovie Ratingbox.Press
toselectthemovieratinglevelyouwanttoallow.
Detailedinformationonratingguidelinesfollowsthis
discussionoftheParentalLockmenu.
8. Tosetthetimeofdayfortheserestrictionstobein
effect,press tomovetotheStartbox.Tomakethe
ratingrestrictionsactivetwenty-fourhoursaday,set
StartandStoptothesametime.Tosetthetime:
a. Withthehournumberhighlightedinyellow,press
repeatedlytochangethehour.Youcanalso
justpressandholdtochangethehour.
b. PressENTERtomovethehighlighttothe
minutes.
c. Withtheminutesnumberhighlightedinyellow,
press repeatedlytochangetheminutes.
Justpressandholdtomovequicklythroughthe
numbers.
d. RepeatthesestepsfortheStoptime.
9. PressMENUtoreturntotheParentalLockmenuor
Other Ratings Menu
ThisTVcanrecognizenewratingsystemsthatmaycome
intoeffectinthefuture.TheOtherRatingsmenuallows
youtoblockdigitalprogrammingbasedonsuchalternate
ratingsystems.Thealternateratingsystemswillapplyto
digitalbroadcastprogrammingonly.
Note: TheOther Ratingsbuttonremainsinaccessible
untiltheTVreceivessignalsforanalternaterating
system.
Thefirsttimeyoutunetoachannelbroadcastinganalter-
nateratingsystem,theTVdefaultstothemostrestrictive
setting.Usethismenutochangetheallowedratingifyou
areunabletowatchaprogrambroadcastwithanalternate
system.
Figure 11. The Other Ratings menu is available only if the
TV receives broadcast signals carrying an alternate rating
system.
Parental Lock Menu, continued
IMPORTANT
New rating systems recognizable by the TV
may be new U.S.-based systems not included
in the original V-Chip rating system. The use
of Canadian in the sample screen is just
one possibility.
Parental Lock Menu, continued
1. HighlightthebuttonlabelledOther Ratingsonthe
ParentalLockmenu(seefigure9)andpressENTERto
opentheOtherRatingsmenu(seefigure11).
2. Press toselectOnorOff.
3. IfyouselectedOn,press tomovetotheRating
Groupbox.
Notethatyoucanchangesettingsonlyfortherating
systemavailableonthecurrentlytunedchannel.In
thefigureabove,forexample,theCanadianrating
systemisineffect.Tochangesettingsatalatertime
fortheCanadianratingsystem,youmustagaintuneto
achannelbroadcastingtheCanadiansystem.
4. Press toselectfromthesubgroupsavailablefor
theratingsystemEnglishorFrenchinthisexample.
5. Press tomovetotheRatingbox.
6. Press toselecttheprogramratinglevelyouwant
toblock.
7. PressENTERtoaddacheckmarktoindicateblockingis
ineffectfortherating.Whenaratingshowsacheck
mark,pressENTERtoremovethecheckmarkandallow
programswiththisrating.
8. Repeatsteps3through7foreachadditionalrating
systemyouwouldliketosetup.
9. PressMENUtoreturntotheParentalLockmenuor
Bypassing the Ratings Lock and Lock by
Time
Ifyoutrytowatchblockedprogramming,anoticeappears
promptingyouforapasscode.TousetheTV:
Inputyourfour-digitpasscodeandpressENTER.
Changetoachannelairinganallowedprogramor
changetoanotherdevice.
IfyoutrytousetheTVwhenitislockedbytime,asimilar
screenappears,promptingyouforyourpasscode.
ToreactivatetheratinglockorTVLockbyTimeafter
usingthepasscode,powertheTVoffandthenon.
TV Ratings
TVratingsapplytoTVprogramsandmade-for-TVmovies.
YoucanapplysupplementalblockingtoTVratingsbasedon
theTVcontentcategoriesdescribedbelow.TVratingsare:
TV-Y Youth.Forchildrenundertheageof7.
TV-Y7 Youth7andolder.
TV-G GeneralAudience.Fortheentirefamilytoview.
TV-PG ParentalGuidance.ParentalGuidanceis
recommended;maynotbesuitableforsome
children.
TV-14 Adolescent14andolder.Notrecommendedfor
childrenundertheageof14.
TV-MA MatureAudience.Foradultsonly.
TV Content Categories
UsedinassociationwiththeTVratingsabove,TVcontent
categoriesallowyoutoapplysupplementalblocking.
ApplysupplementalblockingusingtheU.S.Ratingsmenu.
FV Fantasy Violence.AppliestoTV-Y7only.
D Sexual Dialog.AppliesindifferentdegreestoTV-PG
andTV-14.
L Adult Language.Appliesindifferingdegreesto
TV-PG,TV-14,andTV-MA.
S Sexual Situations.Appliesindifferingdegreesto
TV-PG,TV-14,andTV-MA
V Violence(graphicorrealistic).Appliesindiffering
degreestoTV-PG,TV-14,andTV-MA.
TV Rating FV D L S V
TV-Y
Not Applicable
TV-Y7 X
TV-PG
Not
Appli-
cable
X X X X
TV-14 X X X X
TV-MA X X X
TV content categories. Boxes marked with an X indicate
supplemental blocking you can apply to each rating level.
TheTVratingyouselectisfortheleast-restrictiveprogram
levelallowed.Forexample,ifyouselectTV-PG,programs
ratedTV-Y,TV-Y7,andTV-PGcanbeviewed,butpro-
gramsratedTV-14andTV-MAareblocked.
WhenyouselectaTVcontentcategorytoblock,allTV
programswiththesamecontentcategorylistingare
blocked.Forexample,ifyouselecttoblockV(Violence)
attheTV-14level,anyprogramswiththeVcategorylisting
ratedTV-PGarealsoblocked.
V-Chip Signal Information
Whenprovidedbythebroadcasterorprogramsource,
V-Chipratingsletyoucontrolthetypesofprogramming
thatcanbeviewedontheTV.WhenV-Chipratingsare
supplied,theyaredisplayedwhenyouchangethechannel
orpressINFOontheremotecontrol.
V-CHIP EXCEPTIONS
V-Chipblockingisineffectiveforprogramsviewed
ondevicesconnectedtocomponentorHDMI
inputs.Manyofthesedevices,however,havetheir
ownparental-controlsystems.
Videotapes,laserdiscs,andDVDsmaynot
containV-Chipratingsignals.V-Chipcannot
blockplaybackofrecordingswithoutV-Chiprating
signals.
Broadcastersarenotcurrentlyrequiredtoinclude
V-Chipratingsignals.V-Chipcannotblockpro-
grammingbroadcastwithouttheV-Chiprating
signal.
Movie Ratings
MovieratingsaretheMPAAratingsusedfortheater-
releasedanddirect-to-videomovies.Movieratingsare:
G General Audience.Designedfortheentirefamily
toview.
PG Parental Guidance.ParentalGuidanceis
recommended,maynotbesuitableforsome
children.
PG-13 Parental Guidance, 13 and Older.Not
recommendedforchildrenundertheageof13.
R Restricted.Restrictedintheatersto17yearsold
andolderunlessaccompaniedbyanadult.
NC-17 No Children 17 or Under.Restrictedintheaters
to18yearsoldandolder.
X Adult.Designedforandrestrictedintheatersto
adultaudiencesonly.
Themovieratingyouselectisfortheleast-restrictive
programlevelthatcanbeviewed.Forexample,ifyou
selectthePG-13rating,moviesratedG,PGandPG-13
canbewatched,butmoviesratedR,NC-17,andXare
blocked.
Programs Not Rated:Thisreferstoprogramsthatcarry
norating,suchasnews,sports,weather,emergencybul-
letins,ormoviespriortoorwithoutMPAAratings.This
doesnotincludeprogramswithoutV-Chipsignals.
IMPORTANT
If you enable blocking with the Programs
Not Rated option, you may block news or
emergency bulletins carrying the None or
NR Not Rated V-Chip rating. Use care when
blocking programming that is not rated.
Audio/Video Menu
Figure 12. Audio/Video Menu
A/V Memory Reset
A/VMemoryResetallowsyoutoresetaspecificinputs
A/Vsettingstotheoriginalfactorysettings.Highlightthe
boxandpress toselecttheinputname.Nextpress
ENTER.
TheaudiosettingsofBalance, Listen to,andLanguage
aregeneralTVsettingsunaffectedbyA/VMemoryReset.
ToresetallA/Vsettingsatonce,includingthethree
generalsettings,performanA/VResetbypressingthe
front-panelbuttonsGUIDEandFORMATsimultaneously.
Settings (Audio and Video)
EachinputordevicehasitsownA/Vmemory.Press
toselecttheinputordeviceintheA/V Memory Reset
box,thenselectAudioorVideotoadjustindividual
settings.PressENTERtoclosethemenuanddisplaythe
individualsettings.
Use tocyclethroughtheindividualsettings.Use
tochangethesettingvalues.PressEXITtoreturnto
normalTVviewing.FordescriptionsoftheindividualA/V
settings,seethefollowingpages.
Video Mute
ThedefaultisOn,whichdisplaysabluebackgroundwhen
nosignalisbeingreceivedontheINPUT, COMPO-
NENT,orHDMIjacks.
Film Mode (480i signals only)
Autoisthedefaultsetting.WithAutoselected,theTV
automaticallydetectsandappliesfilm-decodingcorrec-
tionforimagesthatoriginatedon24-frame-per-secondfilm
camerasandwereconvertedto30-frame-per-secondvideo
forbroadcast(3:2pulldownconversion).TrytheOffsetting
iftheTVaddsnoticeablejaggededgestotheimages.
Whentheoriginalvideowasfilmedon30-frame-per-sec-
ondcameras,theAutosettingautomaticallyappliesvideo
decoding,thesameasusedwiththeOffsetting.
FilmModeisnoteffectiveforhigh-definitionsignals.
TV Speakers
ThisselectionturnstheTVsinternalspeakersonoroff.
SelectOff:
Whensendingthesoundthroughaseparatesound
systemorsurroundsoundA/Vreceiver.
IfyourA/VreceiverisunderNetCommandcontrol
Note: Topreventdamagefromasuddenincreaseinvol-
ume,turntheTVvolumedownlowbeforechang-
ingthisoptiontoOn.
Audio/Video Settings and the Remote Control
Toadjustindividualaudioorvideosettingsdirectlywith
theremotecontrol:
1. PressAUDIOorVIDEO repeatedlytocyclethroughthe
availablesettings.
2. Press toadjustthesetting.Thesettingdisplay
willdisappearafterfivesecondsofinactivity.
Audio Settings
Analog and Digital Audio Settings
EntertheaudioadjustmentmodeusingeithertheAudio/
VideomenuortheAUDIOkey.Use tochangesettings.
Someadjustablesettingsdisplayasliderandcorrespond-
ingnumericvalueonscreen.Valuescanbeadjustedfrom
0to63,with31asthemidpoint.
Note: TheeffectsoftheaudiosettingsofBass, Treble,
Balance,andSurroundaffectonlythesound
heardthroughtheTVspeakers.
Bass
Enhancesorreduceslow-pitchedsound.
Treble
Enhancesorreduceshigh-pitchedsound.
Balance
Adjuststhelevelofsoundbetweentheleftandright
TVspeakers.
Surround
Createssimulatedstereoandsurroundeffectsthrough
theTVspeakers.Yourchoicesare:
Off:Nosurroundeffects(default).
Simulated Stereo:TheTVcreatesasimu-
latedstereoeffectwhenwatchinganon-stereo
program.
Surround Sound:TheTVcreatesasimulated
surroundeffectwhenwatchingastereoprogram.
Level Sound
Whenon,automaticallyequalizesthevolumelevel
whentherearesignificantsound-leveldifferences
betweenprogramsegments,suchasbetweenregular
programmingandcommercials.
Toreceivethebestfidelitywithmusicprograms,
changethissettingtoOff.
WhenconnectingtoanA/Vreceiver,setLevel
SoundtoOffandturnofftheTVspeakerstosend
fulldynamicstotheA/Vreceiver.
Analog-Only Audio Settings
Youcansetanalog-onlyaudiosettingswhileviewing
eitheranalogordigitalsources,butthesettingsaffect
onlybroadcastanalogcontent.
Listen To
DetermineshowyourTVreceivesabroadcastaudio
signalandplaysthesoundyouhear.
Yourchoicesare:
Stereo:Defaultsetting.TheTVplaysstereo
broadcastsinstereoandmonobroadcastsin
mono.ThewordStereoisdisplayedwhenyou
tunetoachannelbroadcastinginstereo.
SAP(SecondAudioProgram):Additionalmonau-
ralsoundtrackthatyoucannothearduringnormal
TVviewing.TheSAPsignalmightberelatedto
theprogramyouarewatching,(suchasasound
trackinaforeignlanguage),oritmightbeunre-
lated(suchasaweatherreport).IfanSAPsignal
isbroadcast,thelettersSAParedisplayedwhen
youtunetothechannel.
Mono:Reducesbackgroundnoise.Usewhen
receivingaweakstereoaudiosignal.Allaudiois
playedmonowiththissetting.
Listen Toisnotavailablefor1394devicesordevicescon-
nectedtotheINPUT, COMPONENTandHDMIjacks.
Digital-Only Audio Settings
Youcansetdigital-onlyaudiosettingswhileviewingeither
analogordigitalsources,butthesettingsaffectonly
broadcastdigitalcontent.
Language
Determineswhatpossiblelanguageyoucanhear.
TheLanguageoptionisavailableforIEEE1394
devicesbutnotfordevicesconnectedtotheINPUT,
COMPONENT,andHDMIjacks.Language
choicesare:
English Portuguese
French Spanish
German Other
Italian
IEEE 1394 Amplifier Settings
Balance
Adjuststhelevelofsoundbetweentheleftandright
speakers.Thesliderrangeis0254,with127asthe
midpoint.
Loudness
Whenon,makestheaudiolevelmoreuniform.
Preset
Selectthemodethatmatchestheaudiosource.Your
choicesare:
Off Classical Music
Jazz Movie
Rock Speech
Equalizer
Equalizesthesound.
Audio/Video Menu, continued
Video Settings
EnterthevideoadjustmentmodeusingeithertheAudio/
VideomenuortheVIDEOkey.PresstheVIDEOkeyrepeatedly
tocyclethroughthevideooptionstotheoneyouwantto
change.Use tochangesettings.
Note: Asliderdisplaysonscreenforsomesettings.
Whenthesliderisdisplayed,itrepresentsnumeric
values,with63asthemaximum,31asthemid-
point,and0astheminimum.
Picture Mode: SetthePictureModefirstbefore
adjustingothersettings,aseachPictureModestores
itsownvaluesforContrast,Brightness,andColor
Temperature.PictureModesallowyoutooptimizethe
imagefordifferentlightingconditions.ThePicture
Modesare:
Bright:Suitedformostdaytimeviewing.
Natural:Suitedformostnighttimeviewing.
Brilliant:Thedefaultsetting.Foruseunder
stronglight.
Contrast (Bright/Natural/Brilliant):Providesasliderto
adjustthewhite-to-blacklevel.Lowcontrastshowsa
varietyofshadesindarkerimages,whilehighcontrast
showsdarkerimagesmoreuniformlyblackandmakes
colorsappearmorevibrant.Inmosthomelighting
situations,amediumcontrastlooksbest.Highcon-
trastisgoodforbrightlylitenvironments.
Brightness (Bright/Natural/Brilliant):Providesaslider
toadjusttheoverallbrightnessofthepicture.
Color: Providesaslidertoadjustcolorintensity.
Tint: Providesaslidertoadjustthered-to-greenratio.
Sharpness: Providesaslidertoadjustthedetailand
clarity.
Color Temperature (Bright/Natural/Brilliant):Allows
youtoadjusthowwhiteisdisplayed.
Low:Whiteimageshaveawarmcast.This
adjustmentisanaverageandcanvarydueto
ambientroomlighting,videoscenebrightness,
andtheTVsage.Natural/ColorTempatthe
lowsettingdisplaysvideoatthe6500Kindustry
standardforNTSCpictures.
High:Whiteimageshaveacoolcast.Thissetting
mayprovidethemostrealisticpictureunderbright
lighting.
PerfectColor: Letsyouadjusttheintensityofany
orallofsixcolors(Magenta,Red,Yellow,Green,Cyan
andBlue)tocreatecolorbalanceforthecurrentimage
source.PerfectColorsettingsarememorizedforeach
TVinputordevice.
SelectthePerfectColoroptionandpressENTERto
opentheadjustmentscreen.
Individualslidersforeachcoloraredisplayed.Press
tomovefromonecolortothenext.Highlighted
textshowswhichslideryouareadjusting.Press
tochangesettings.PressCANCEL whileinthe
PerfectColorscreentoresetallcolorstothedefault
settings.
Name of affected input
PerfectColor Adjust Mode
Figure 13. Set PerfectColor adjustments independently
for each TV input.
PerfecTint (models WD-57732, WD-65732,
WD-73732):Providesfurthercolorrefinementusing
sixcolorslidersmemorizedforeachinput.Touse
PerfecTint:
1. WiththePerfectColorscreendisplayedandwith
Adjust Modehighlightedinyellowcharacters,
press toopenthePerfecTintscreen.
2. Press tomovefromonecolortothenext.
Press tochangesettings.PressCANCEL to
resettothedefaultsettings.
3. ToreturntoPerfectColor,highlightAdjust Mode
inyellowcharactersandpress .
Name of affected input
PerfecTint Adjust Mode
Figure 14. PerfecTint adjustments for each TV input let
you further refine color adjustments..
Video Noise: Reducesminornoise(graininess)in
thepicture.UsetheLowsettingwithgood-quality
signals.UseHighwithpoor-qualitysignals.Turnoff
toleavethepictureunaltered.
DeepField Imager (models WD-57732,
WD-65732, WD-73732): WhenOnisselected,the
blacklevelsaredynamicallyenhancedinportionsof
thescreentoprovidestrongcontrastwithdetailover
mixedscreencontent.WhenOffisselected,the
entirescreenadjuststhecontrastthesame.When
Demoisselected,asplitscreenpictureappearsand
youcanseehowthepicturewilllookwhenDeepField
Imagerison(rightside)orwhenitisoff(leftside).
SharpEdge (models WD-57732, WD-65732,
WD-73732): WhenOnisselected,specialedge
sharpnessenhancementsareappliedtothevertical
edgesofimages.
Personal Computer Video Settings
Videosettingsavailableforimagesfromapersonalcom-
puterare:
Contrast
Brightness
PerfectColor.Theadjustmentscreendisplays
withouttheverticalcolorbarswhenusedforacom-
puterimage.
PerfecTint (models WD-57732, WD-65732,
WD-73732)
Auto Position: PressENTERtoautomaticallycenterthe
positionofthePCvideo.
HorizPosition (Horizontal Position): Manuallyadjust
thehorizontalpositionofPCvideo.Thisselection
overridestheAutoPositionselection.
VertPosition (Vertical Position): Manuallyadjustthe
verticalpositionofPCvideo.Thisselectionoverrides
theAutoPositionselection.
Fine Detail: ManuallyadjustthepicturequalityofPC
video,analogsignalsonly.Thisselectionoverrides
theAutoPositionselection.
6
NetCommand Functions
NetCommand-Controlled Devices and the Input Selection Menu . . 78
NetCommand-Controlled Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Using IEEE 1394 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
78 Chapter 6. NetCommand Functions
NetCommand-Controlled Devices
and the Input Selection Menu
FordevicesunderNetCommandcontrol,theInputSelec-
tionmenuallowsyouto:
Selectthedeviceforviewing
SwitchaudiobetweentheTVspeakersandA/V
receiver
Powercompatibledevicesonoroff
Verifythedestinationofsignals.
Connection
Section
Input
Section
Audio
Section
Figure 1. The Input selection menu for a NetCommand-
controlled device.
Input Section
Press tohighlightaninputiconandpressENTER
toselecttheinputtoviewandhear.Learnedinputsona
compatibleA/Vreceiverareautomaticallychangedatthe
sametime.
Connection Section
TheConnectionsectionshowsifthereisarecordingin
progressandthedevicethatisrecordingfromthesource.
Forexample,iftheDigitalVCR(D-VCR)iscurrentlyrecord-
ingfromANT 1,whenyoumovethehighlighttotheAnt-1
icon,theD-VCRiconappearsintheConnectionSection.
Thisicondisappearswhenyoumovethehighlightto
anothericonorpressCANCELtostoprecording.
Audio Section
ANetCommand-controlledA/Vreceiverconnectedtothe
TVappearsasanAVRiconintheAudiosection.Press
AUDIOtochangenavigationtotheAudiosection.Then
press toselecteithertheTVspeakersiconortheA/V
receivericon.PressENTERtochangetheaudioselection.
PressINPUTtoreturnnavigationtotheInputsection.
The Remote Control and NetCommand
PointtheTVsremotecontrolattheTVwhenoperat-
ingNetCommand-controlleddevices.Seethechartin
chapter3,TVSetup,toreviewdevicefunctionsyoucan
learnforthedevice.Furtherinformationonsomefunc-
tionsisincludedhere.
The Input Selection Menu and NetCommand
Power Devices On/Off
Firstlearnthepowerkey(s)forthedevice.PressINPUT
todisplaytheInputSelectionmenu.IfyoupressPOWER
withoutfirstdisplayingtheInputSelectionmenu,theTV
willturnoff.
Devices with separate ON and OFF remote control
keys.Thesedevicespoweronautomaticallywhen
youselectthedeviceintheInputSelectionmenuand
willpoweroffwhenyouturnofftheTV.
Devices that do not power on or off automatically.
Topoweron:HighlightthedeviceiconintheInput
SelectionmenuandpressPOWER.PressENTERtoselect
thedevice.
Topoweroff:PressINPUTtoopentheInputSelection
menuandhighlightthedeviceicon.PressPOWERon
theTVsremotecontrol.
A/V receiver. OpentheInputSelectionmenuand
pressAUDIOtomovenavigationtotheAudiosection.
HighlighttheA/VreceivericonandpressPOWERonthe
TVsremotecontrol.
Additional Functions
HighlightthedeviceiconintheInputSelectionmenu
andpressENTERtoselectthedevice.Re-opentheInput
Selectionmenuandpressthelearnedkeyindicatedin
thetablebelow.
Learned Key for the Device Action
MENU CloseSplitScreenbefore-
hand,ifactive.PressMENU
toopenthedevicesmenu.
Use tonavigate
themenu.
GUIDE(Learnedtochange
VCRinputs)
PressGUIDErepeatedlyto
cyclethroughtheVCRs
inputs.
IMPORTANT
If a device does not respond to separate ON
or OFF signals from the remote control, the
manufacturer has not provided that capabil-
ity for the device.
Chapter 6. NetCommand Functions 79
NetCommand-Controlled Recording
Thissectiondescribesmakingrecordingsindependently
oftheTVGuideOnScreensystem.Forinstructionson
settinguprecordingsusingTVGuideOnScreen,seethe
separateTV Guide On Screen Interactive Program Guide
Users Manual.
Recording from the Recording Setup Menu
Youcanscheduletherecordingtotakeplaceatalater
timeandprogramtherecordingdurationforaminimum
of30minutesandamaximumofsixhours(in30-minute
increments).Thedefaultisonehour.Duringtherecord-
ing,youcanviewadifferentdeviceorpowerofftheTV.
Immediate Recording from the Menu
1. Press (RECORD)toopentheRecordingSetupmenu.
Figure 2. The Recording Setup menu
2. Reviewtherecordingsetupinformation.Movethe
highlighttoeachboxyouneedtochange.
Withtheleftmosticonhighlighted(thesource),
press tochangethesourceinputifneeded.
Channel. Ifthesourceisanantenna,selecta
memorizedchannelusing , CH / ,orenter
thechannelnumberfromtheremotecontroland
pressENTER.
Record To.Ifyouhavemorethanonerecordable
deviceconnected,use toselectitfromthe
listintheRecord Tobox.
Duration.Use toselectarecordingduration
offrom30minutestosixhoursin30-minuteincre-
ments.Thedefaultisonehour.
3. Press asecondtimetostartrecording.
Time-Delayed Recording from the Menu
1. EnsurethatTVEnergyModeissettoFast Power On
andtheTVclockissettothecorrecttimeandday.
UsetheSetupmenutomakechanges.
2. Press (RECORD)toopentheRecordingSetupmenu.
3. Reviewtherecordingsetupinformation.Tochange
thesource,recordingdevice,orduration,followthe
stepsdescribedaboveunderRecordingNow.
4. Specifywhentostarttherecording.
Start Time
a. Withthehourhighlightedingoldcharacters,
press toselectthehour,includingAMor
PM.PressENTERtomovethehighlighttothe
minutes.
b. Withtheminuteshighlighted,press to
selecttheminutes.
Day.Use toselectadayoftheweek.
5. SelectAddandpressENTERtoaddtherecordingto
theRecordList.Aconfirmationmessagewillbe
displayedifyourselectionissuccessful.Ifyoupick
overlappingtimes,day(s),ordestinationdevices,you
willseeamessagestatingthereisaconflict.
6. WhiletheRecordingSetupmenuisdisplayed,press
GUIDEtodisplaytheRecordList(seefigure3).Inthe
RecordListyoucanviewalistofscheduledrecord-
ingsandverifytheadditionoftherecordingtothe
schedule.Amaximumof32recordingscanbe
scheduled.
7. FromtheRecordListyoucan:
PressCANCELtodeletearecordingfromtheschedule.
PressGUIDEtoreturntotheRecordingSetupmenu.
PressEXITtoreturntoTVviewing.
PressMENUtoreturntotheMainmenu.
Figure 3. Record List screen. From the Record menu,
press GUIDE to open the Record List to review or cancel
scheduled recordings.
TV Guide On Screen and the Record List
ProgramsscheduledthroughTVGuideOnScreendonot
appearintheRecordList.RefertotheseparateTV Guide
On Screen Interactive Program Guide Users Manual
forinformationregardingschedulingrecordingswithTV
GuideOnScreen.
Ifthereisaconflictbetweenarecordingscheduled
throughTVGuideOnScreenandtheRecordList,theTV
GuideOnScreenrecordingtakespriority.
Recording from the ChannelView Channel
Guide
ChannelViewisavailablewhenTVGuideOnScreenis
disabled.ChannelViewprovidesprogramlistings,assent
bythebroadcasters,formemorizedchannelsonANT 1
andANT 2.PresstheGUIDEkeywhilewatchingANT 1or
ANT 2toviewChannelViewlistingsandtosetupimme-
diateorfuturerecordingsasdescribedhere.
Immediate Recording from ChannelView
1. PressINPUTtoopentheInputSelectionmenu.High-
lightanANT 1orANT 2programsourceandpress
ENTER.
2. PressGUIDEtoopentheChannelViewchannelguidefor
thecurrentantennainput.
3. Use tohighlightthechannelandprogramyou
wishtorecordfromthelistofchannels.
4. Press (RECORD).TheTVwilltunetothechannelif
needed.
AredRtemporarilydisplaysnexttotheprogram
listingtoindicatetheprogramwillberecorded.
Figure 4. A red R appears briefly in the ChannelView
screen to indicate a scheduled recording.
Time-Delayed Recording from ChannelView
Set Up the Recording
1. EnsurethatTVEnergyModeissettoFast Power On
andtheTVclockissettothecorrecttimeandday.
SeeSetupMenuinchapter3,TVSetup.
2. Performsteps1and2describedabove.
3 Press tohighlightthesourcechannelfromwhich
youwishtorecord.
4. Press toviewalistoffutureprogramsonthat
channel.
5. Press tohighlightafutureprogram.
6. Press (RECORD).
AredRtemporarilydisplaysnexttotheprogram
listingtoindicatetheprogramwillberecorded.
Youcanscheduleamaximumof32recordings.
7. PressEXITtoclosethemenu.
Confirm the Recording Setup
1. Press (RECORD)toopentheRecordmenu.
NetCommand-Controlled
Recording, continued
2. PressGUIDEtoopentheRecordList(figure2)andview
allscheduledrecordings.PressCH / topage
quicklythroughthelist.
3. Verifythattheprogramyouwishtorecordappearsin
thelist.
Cancelling Recordings
To Cancel a Recording in Progress
1. PressINPUTtoopentheInputSelectionmenu.
2. Movethehighlighttothesourceinputicon.Thereis
noneedtopressENTER.
TheInputSelectionmenudisplaysaniconforan
activerecordingconnection.Seetheconnectionicon
infigure5.
3. PressCANCEL.Theconnectioniconwilldisappearto
indicateterminationoftherecordingconnection.
4. PressEXIT toreturntoTVviewing.
Connection
Icon
Figure 5. The Input Selection menu displays an icon for
the destination device of a recording in progress.
To Cancel a Scheduled Recording
1. Press (RECORD)toopentheRecordmenu.
2. PressGUIDEtoopentheRecordList(figure2)andview
allscheduledrecordings.PressCH / topage
quicklythroughthelist.
3. Highlighttheprogramyouwishtoremovefromthe
RecordListandpressCANCEL.
Default Digital (Recording) Device
Ifyouhavemorethanonedigitalrecordingdevicecon-
nected,thisoptionletsyouspecifywhichtouseasthe
default.Thedevicespecifiedhereisthedigitalrecord-
ingdevicetousewheninitiatingarecordingwiththe
(RECORD)keyfromwithinChannelView.
Thisoptionremainsgrayedout(unavailable)untilyou
connectadigitalrecordingdevice.Afterthedeviceis
detectedandnamed,highlighttheboxandpress to
selecttherecordingdevice.
Notethatdigitalprogramscanberecordedoneither
adigitaloranalogdevice.Forbestplaybackquality,
however,recorddigitalprogramsonadigitalrecording
device.
Analog Recordings
Whenyourecorda16:9digitalchanneltoananalogVCR
orrecordingdevice,thereisamismatchbetweenthe16:9
ratioofthepictureshapefromthesourceandthenar-
rower4:3ratiooftheanalogrecorder.
ForanamorphicplaybackonthiswidescreenTV,
choosetheanamorphicpicturedisplayandensure
IMPORTANT
When setting up analog recordings in TV
Guide On Screen, set the destination record-
ing device as the analog device connected
to the TVs MONITOR OUT VIDEO/LEFT/
RIGHT jacks.
Record Menu: Setting Recording Defaults
TheRecordmenuallowsyoutosetdefaultsforyour
recordingdevices,setuprecordings,viewtheRecordList,
andcancelscheduledrecordings.HighlighttheRecord
iconontheMainmenutoviewtheRecordmenu.
Figure 6. Record menu
Record Setup
HighlightRecord SetupandpressENTERtodisplaythe
RecordingSetupmenu,describedearlier.
Record List
HighlightRecord ListandpressENTERtodisplaythe
RecordList,describedearlierinthischapter.
Copy-Protected Material
Whenattemptingtorecordcopy-protectedmaterial,the
recordfunctionsoftheNetCommandandIEEE1394
systemsmaybepreventedorstopped.Ifyouhave
aprogramthatwasoriginallytaggedRecord Once,
NetCommandwillchangethetagtoRecord No Moreon
thenewrecording.
VCR Recording
Setting Up Analog VCR Recordings with TV
Guide On Screen
WhensettinguparecordingusingTVGuideOnScreen,
notethat:
YoumustselectthedesiredrecordingdeviceintheTV
GuideOnScreenRecordOptionsmenu.
Ifyouhavebothanaloganddigitalrecordingdevices,
alwaysverifythattheanalogdeviceisthedefault
devicebeforestartingananalogrecordingwiththe
(RECORD)key.
Thedestinationrecordingdeviceforanalogrecord-
ingsmustbetheanalogdeviceconnectedtotheTVs
MONITOR OUTjacks.
Restrictions for Traditional VCRs
with NetCommand- and TV Guide On
Screen-Controlled Recording
YourVCRmustbeconnecteddirectlytothe
MONITOR OUT VIDEOandLEFT/RIGHT
outputs.
thattheTVscreenformatissettostandard(seethe
sectiononTVformatsinthisOwnersGuide).
Forcroppedplaybackonanolderstyle4:3TV,choose
thecroppeddisplaytoremovethetopandbottom
sections.Thissettingdoesnotaffectrecordingfrom
analogdevices,analogchannels,or4:3digitalchan-
nels.
Direct VCR Recording from an Antenna or
Cable Source
WhenyourVCRisthecurrentdevice, (RECORD)onthe
TVsremotecontrolfunctionsthesameastherecord
buttonontheVCRsremotecontrolorfrontpanel.
Torecorddirectlyfromantennaorcable:
1. PressINPUTontheTVsremotetodisplaytheInput
Selectionmenu.HighlightthetraditionalVCR
andpressPOWERtoturnontheVCR.Ifnecessary,
pressGUIDEtoselecttheinputtheVCRison,such
asAntennainput(orlineinput).
2. PressENTERtoswitchtheTVtotheVCR.
3. Selectthecorrectchannelforrecordingonthe
VCRandthenpress (RECORD)tostartrecord-
ing.Youwillneedtostoptherecordingmanually
attheendoftheprogram
TheVCRmustbesetmanuallytoLineInput.
DisplaytheInputSelectionmenu,highlighttheVCR
andpressGUIDEtochangeVCRinputs.
TheTVcanselectchannelsoncompatiblecable
boxesforrecordingswhenthecableboxisunder
NetCommandcontrol.Leavethecableboxturnedon.
Ifthesourcedeviceorrecordingdevicedoesnothave
separatepoweronandofffeatures,thenleavethat
devicepoweredon.
Youcannotrecordfromsourcedevicesconnectedto
theTVCOMPONENTinputsorHDMI1or2con-
nections.
Using IEEE 1394 Devices
IEEE 1394 Devices and the Input Selection
Menu
WhenyouconnectanIEEE1394devicetotheTVnetwork
andpoweriton,thenewdeviceisautomaticallydetected.
Somenon-audio/videoorincompatibleIEEE1394devices,
suchaspersonalcomputers(PCs),maynotbedetected
bytheTVanddonotappearintheInputSelectionmenu.
Suchdevicescan,however,coexistandarestillavailable
toworkwithotherdevicesontheIEEE1394networkthat
arecompatiblewiththesenon-audio/videodevices.
Somedevicesmaybeacombinationoftwoormoretypes
ofdevices,suchasarecordingdevicethatisalsoatuning
device.Eachportionofthedeviceiscalledasub-unit.
WhenyouselectadeviceontheInputSelectionmenu
thathassub-units,apop-upmenuwillappeartoallow
youtoselectthesub-unityouwishtouse.
Recording to IEEE 1394 Devices
YoucanusetheTVtocontrolrecordingtoIEEE1394
devices.Thefollowingtableletsyouseewhatsignalscan
berecordedtoanIEEE1394digitalVCRorA/Vdisc.
Recording
Availability
Signal Type TV Input
Canbe
recorded
Digitalchannels,includ-
inghigh-definition
channels
ANT 1, ANT 2
Digitalsignals,including
high-definitionsignals
IEEE1394devices
Cannotbe
recorded
Analogchannels ANT 1, ANT 2
Analogsignals INPUT 1-3,
COMPONENT
inputs
Digitalsignals HDMI 1and2,
PC-DVI
Summary of signal inputs and recording to an IEEE 1394
digital VCR or A/V disc.
Switching Between Analog and Digital IEEE
1394 Outputs
Toenableswitchingbetweenanaloganddigitaloutputs,
youmusthavecheckmarkedtheAnalog Connectionbox
whentheNew1394Devicescreendisplayedwhenyou
firstconnectedthedevice.Seechapter3,TVSetup.
Figure 7. The ClearThought Auto Input sensing screen
for IEEE 1394 devices. Place a check in the Analog
Connection box if your device has both analog and digital
outputs.
2. HighlighttheiconfortheIEEE1394deviceandpress
ENTER.
3. Press toswitchbetweeniconsrepresentingthe
analoganddigitaloutputsofthedevice.Seefigure8.
Figure 8. The Input Selection menu shows icons for the
analog and digital outputs of the IEEE 1394 device.
4. PressENTERagaintoselectthedevice.
The TV Remote Control and IEEE 1394
Devices
Forcompatiblesatellitereceiversandsomecable
boxes,theTVremotecontrolGUIDEkeydisplaysthe
on-screenprogrammingguideforthereceiverorcable
box.Press andENTERtonavigatethedis-
playedprogramguide.
Forsatellitereceivers,youmayalsobeabletousethe
numbersorotheradditionalbuttons.
ForanIEEE1394cableboxorsatellitereceiver,you
canalsotryusingtheCABLE/SATpositionoftheTV
remotecontroltoseeifitcanoperatethedevice.If
not,usetheremotecontrolthatcamewiththedevice.
Operation of IEEE 1394 Devices with the TVs Remote Control
(slide switch set to TV position)
Device
CABLE/SAT A/V DISC DVCR AMPLIFIER
Remote Con-
trol Key
POWER Powerthedeviceon/offwhenhighlightedintheInputselectionmenu.Seetheinstructionsabove.
CH / Channelup/down
Pageup/down
(whentracklistisdisplayed)
Indexsearchforward/re-
verse
(ifsupportedbyDVCR)
VOL / VolumeUp/Down
MUTE MuteOn/Off
0-9 (DIGITS) Numberfunctions
Searchbytime
(whenfollowedby ENTER)
QV LastChannelRecall
EXIT Exitmenus/displays Exitmenus/displays Exitmenus/displays
ENTER Enterorselect Enterorselect Enterorselect
CANCEL Cancelfunction DeleterecordingfromTrackList
Cancelfunctionorcounter
reset
GUIDE
Digital-channelguide
(mayneedtopress
twice)
DisplayTrackList.
Up/down/left/right
Skiptobeginningofprogram
Up/downintracklist
SkipBackwards12seconds
duringplayback
SkipForward30seconds
duringplayback
Up/down/left/right
PLAY
Play Play
STOP
Stop Stop
RECORD
Record Record
REV
ReversepicturescanorSlowPlay ReverseorRewind
FFWD
FastpicturescanorFastPlay FastPlayorFastForward
PAUSE
Pause Pause
To Power On or Off a Compatible IEEE 1394
Device
Usually,compatibleIEEE1394devicespoweronwhen
selectedintheInputSelectionmenuandpoweroffwhen
youturnofftheTV.Ifyouneedmanualcontroloverpower
on/off:
1. PressINPUTtoopentheInputSelectionmenu.
2. Movethehighlighttotheiconforthedevice.Thereis
noneedtopressENTER.
3. PressPOWER.
Copying A/V Disc Recordings
Tracksyourecordtodiscmayhavecopyrestrictions
assignedtothem.Tolearnatrackscopystatus,high-
lightthetrackintheTrackListandpressINFO.Tracksare
assignedoneoftheseratings:
Copy Free
(ornostatusshown)
Nocopyrestrictionsapply.
Copy Never Thetrackcannotbetransferredto
anotherrecordingdevice.Tracks
ofthistypemayhaveanassigned
retentionperiod.Seebelowfor
moreinformation.
TheTrackListmayalsodisplaycopystatusforatrack.
Youmayseethefollowingstatusdisplays:
Copy Once Thetrackcanbecopiedonceonly.
Copy No More Ifaretentionvalueisshown,the
trackmaybemovableusingyour
otherA/Vequipment.Mitsubishi
TVsdonotsupportthisfunction.
Retention Period
SomeCopy Nevertrackshavearetentionperiodassigned
bythecontentprovider.Theretentionperiodisthelength
oftimeyoucankeepandviewtherecording.Theinitial
retentionperiod,ifany,isshownnexttothecopystatus
intheTrackListINFOdisplay.Tocheckhowmuchtime
remainsoftheretentionperiod,startviewingtherecording
andpressINFO.
Note: Theretentionperiodforalltracksonthedisc
expiresifthereisanylossofpowertotheTV,even
momentary.Forexample,expirationofthereten-
tionperiodwilloccurifyou:
UnplugtheTVfromtheACpowersource.
Experienceapoweroutageorpower
fluctuation.
RememberthatyoucansafelyturnoffTVpower
usingthePOWERbuttonwithoutaffectingthereten-
tionperiod.
To Copy a Track to Another IEEE 1394 Device
1. PressINPUTontheremotecontrolandpress
toselectthesourceA/Vdisc.PressENTERtoopenthe
TrackList.
2. Press or toselectatrack.ThenpressENTERto
startplayback.
3. Press (PAUSE)topauseplayback.
4. Press (RECORD)ontheTVremote.TheRecord
menuwilldisplay.
5. IntheRecord Tosection,reviewthedestination
device(A/VDisc,DVCR).Changeifnecessary.If
moving,leavetheothersettingsunchanged.
6. Press asecondtimetostartrecording.
A/V Disc Search by Time
WhileplayinganIEEE1394A/Vdiscyoucansearchtoa
specifictimeintherecording.
1. StartplayingthedesiredtrackontheA/Vdisc.
2. Usethenumberbuttonstoenterthetimecodeposi-
tionofhoursfollowedbyminutes.Forexample,to
enteronehourandtwenty-twominutes(1:22)intothe
track,enter1, 2, 2.
3. PressENTERtoskiptothetimecodeposition.To
canceltherequestortostartover,pressCANCEL
insteadofENTER.
A/V Discs
A/V Disc Track List Screen
WhenviewinganA/VDisc:
PressGUIDEtodisplayitsTrackList(seefigurebelow).
Press or tonavigatethroughtheTrackList.
Toplayatrack,selectitonthelist,thenpressENTER.
PressINFOtoviewdetailsforahighlightedtrack,if
available.
Tomovethroughlistingsquickly,pressPAGE / .
Todeleteatrack,highlightitandpressCANCEL.
Figure 9. A/V Disc Track List screen
86 Chapter 6. NetCommand Functions 86 Chapter 6. NetCommand Functions
Using the TV with a Personal Computer
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Video Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Connecting a Computer to the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Adjusting Image Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Computer Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7
88 Chapter 7. Using the TV with a Personal Computer
Setup
1. SeetheTVspecificationsinAppendixBtoconfirm
thatyourcomputervideosignaliscompatiblewiththe
TV.
2. Notewhetherthecomputersuppliesadigitalor
analogvideosignal.Youwillneedthisinformation
duringthesetupprocedure.
Digitalvideosignal:Comesfromthecomputers
DVIorHDMIoutput.
Analogvideosignal:Comesfromthecomputers
VGA15-pinoutputandrequiresaVGA-to-DVI
cableoraVGAcableandVGA/DVIadapter.
3. PowerontheTV.
IMPORTANT
In the next step, select the correct video signal
type (analog or digital) in the NetCommand
menu. Otherwise, the TV will be unable to
display a picture from the computer.
4. PressMENUtoopentheMainmenu,highlightthe
NetCommandicon,andpressENTER.
5. HighlightthePC-DVItextboxandpress tochange
thesettingtomatchyourcomputersvideosignal
type,eitherDigitalorAnalog.
Figure 1. Specify your computers video signal type
(analog or digital) in the NetCommand menu.
6. PressEXITtocloseallmenus.
7. ConnectthecomputersvideooutputtotheTVs
PC-DVI jack.Seetheconnectiondiagramsinthis
chaptertofindthemethodbestsuitedtoyourequip-
ment.
8. Connectthecomputersaudiooutputusingoneof
theseoptions:
Connectanalogleft/rightaudiototheTVs
PC-DVI AUDIOjack.
Ifyourcomputeroffersdigitalaudiooutput,
connectittoadigitalA/Vreceiverinstead.
IMPORTANT
SeeAppendixBforsignalcompatibility.
Note
ThePC-DVIinputontheTVcanaccepteither
analog(DVI-A)ordigital(DVI-D)signals.
YoumustspecifythePC DVI Inputsettinginthe
NetCommandmenuaseitherAnalogorDigital,
dependingonthesignaltypesentbyyourcomputer.
Ifyourcomputeroffersdigitalaudiooutput,youcan
connectyourcomputersdigitalaudioouttoadigital
inputonadigitalA/Vreceiver.
Video Adjustments
1. Poweronthecomputerifitisnotalreadyon.
2. SelectPCfromtheInputSelectionmenu.Todothis,
pressINPUTtoopentheInputSelectionmenu,movethe
highlighttothePCicon,andpressENTER.
3. Changetheresolutionofthecomputerimage.The
goalistomaximizethecomputerresolutionwhile
maintainingasuitableaspectratiofortheimage.See
theexplanationlaterinthischapter.
4. PerformTVvideoadjustments.PressVIDEOrepeat-
edlytocyclethroughthevideo-adjustmentoptions.
Thefollowingadditionaladjustmentsareavailablefor
computervideo:
Auto Position. PressENTERtoautomaticallycenter
thepositionofthePCvideo.
HorizPosition(HorizontalPosition).Manually
adjustthehorizontalpositionofthePC.This
selectionoverridestheAuto Positionselection.
VertPosition(VerticalPosition).Manuallyadjust
theverticalpositionofthePC.Thisselection
overridestheAuto Positionselection.
Fine Detail(analogDVI-Asignalsonly).Manually
adjustthepicturequalityofthePC.Thisselection
overridestheAuto Positionselection.
5. ChangetheTVpictureformattosuittheimage.
PressFORMATtocyclethroughtheavailablepicture
formats.Seethechartlaterinthischaptershowing
howvariouscomputerresolutionsaredisplayedon
theTV.
To Remove the Computer Icon from
the Input Selection Menu
Whenyoudisconnectananalogvideoconnectionfroma
personalcomputer,thecomputericonremainsintheInput
Selectionmenuuntilyouremoveit.
1. IntheNetCommandmenu,highlightthePC DVI Inputbox.
2. HighlightthePC DVI Inputboxandpress toselect
Digital.
3. PressEXITtocloseallmenus.
ThenexttimeyouopentheInputSelectionmenu,the
computericonwillnolongerappear.
Chapter 7. Using the TV with a Personal Computer 89
Computer with HDMI Digital Monitor Output
Required:HDMI-to-DVIcableoranHDMIcablewithan
HDMI/DVIadapter,stereoaudiocables
Ifthecomputersaudiooutputisasingleminijack,amini
audio-to-RCA-maleYadaptercableisalsorequired.
1. ConnectthecomputersHDMIoutputtotheTVs
PC-DVIjack.UseeitheranHDMI-to-DVIcableoran
HDMIcablewithanHDMI/DVIadapter.
2. Connecttheleft(white)andright(red)audiocables
fromthecomputersAUDIO OUT toPC-DVI
AUDIOontheTVbackpanel.
!5$)//54 !5$)//54
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394 DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
PC - Dvl
PC-DVI
AUDIO
1.
1.
2.
2.
Persona| Computer w|th HDMI Output
HDMI-to-DVI Cab|e
Figure 3. Connecting a personal computer with an HDMI
monitor output
Connecting a Computer to the TV
Computer with DVI Digital Monitor Output
Required:DVI-to-DVIcable,stereoaudiocables
1. ConnecttheDVI-to-DVIcablefromthecomputerDVI
outputtothePC-DVIjackontheTVbackpanel.
fromAUDIO OUTonthePCbackpanelto
PC-DVI AUDIOontheTVbackpanel.
AUDlO OUT
LEFT
RlGHT
$6)/54
!5$)//54
$6)/54
!5$)//54
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394 DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
PC - Dvl
DVI-to-DVI Cab|e
Persona| Computer w|th DVI Output
TV Back Pane|
PC-DVI
AUDIO
1.
1.
2.
2.
Figure 2. Connecting a personal computer with DVI Monitor
Output
90 Chapter 7. Using the TV with a Personal Computer
Computer with VGA 15-Pin Monitor Output
(Analog Video)
Required:15-pincomputerVGA-to-DVIcableoraVGA
computercableandaDVI/VGAadapter,stereoaudio
cable.
IMPORTANT
To use this connection, you must first select the
Analog setting in the PC DVI box of the NetCommand
menu. See the Setup section for more.
1. ConnectthecomputersPC MONITOR OUTto
PC-DVIontheTVbackpanel.UseeitheraVGA-
to-DVImonitorcableoraVGAcomputercablewitha
VGA/DVIadapter.
fromthecomputersanalogaudioouputtoPC-DVI
AUDIOontheTVbackpanel.
PC-Dvl
AUDlO
AUDlO
OUT
1 2 3
COMPONENT
1 2
lNPUT
MONlTOR
OUT
1
HDMl / Dvl AUDlO
lEEE 1394 DlGlTAL
AUDlO
OUT
HDMl
PC - Dvl
1 2
vlDEO
LEFT
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
Y
Pb
Pr
AUDlO
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO
RlGHT
LEFT
RlGHT
USE WlTH
CableCARD
S-vlDEO
vlDEO
AUDlO-
LEFT
(MONOj
AUDlO-
RlGHT
HDMl COMPATlBlLlTY
vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

vlDEO: 480i/480p/720p/1080i
2
TM
R
PC - Dvl
$PNQVUFSXJUI7(".POJUPS0VUQVU
7("UP%7*$BCMF
Figure 4. Connecting a computer with a VGA 15-pin monitor
output.
Connecting a Computer to the TV,
continued
Chapter 7. Using the TV with a Personal Computer 91
Adjusting Image Resolution
YourMitsubishiTVcandisplayresolutionsfromstandard
VGA(640x480)through1920x1080signalsatarefresh
rateof60Hz.Notethat1280x1024and1920x1080
signalsaresupportedonlyfordigitalcomputersignals.
Theresolutionof1920x1080issupportedatrefreshrates
of24,30,and60Hz.SeeAppendixBinthisbookfor
moreoncompatiblescreenresolutions.
Inmostcases,thecomputerwillselectthebestresolution
matchtodisplayontheTV.Youcanoverridethissettingif
youwish.Theinstructionsbelowareforsettingthereso-
lutiononmostpersonalcomputers.
1. InthePCsStartmenu,selectSettings.
2. SelectControl Panel.
3. SelectDisplay.
4. ChoosetheSettingstab.
5. Changetheresolutiontothehighestresolutionwith
theaspectratiobestsuitedfortheimage.Seethe
tableonthenextpageshowingpossiblePCformats.
Dependingonyourcomputersoperatingsystem,
adjusttheresolutionwitheither:
theScreenareaslider.
theScreenResolutionslider
NOTE: WhenevertheTVispoweredon,thelampisin
use,eveniftheTVscreenappearsdark.Asa
reminderthattheTVispoweredonandthattime
isbeingaddedtothelampselapsedhours,set
thecomputersscreensavertoapatternthatwill
displayafterseveralminutesofinactivity.

Figure 5. Computer resolution, XGA selection

6. Tochangetherefreshrate,clickontheAdvanced
button.
7. OntheMonitor tab,selectasettingfromtheScreen
refresh ratedrop-downlist.Theresolutionof1920x
1080issupportedat24,30,and60Hz;otherresolu-
tionsaresupportedat60Hz.
Youmayneedtorestartthecomputerforthischangeto
takeeffect.
92 Chapter 7. Using the TV with a Personal Computer 92 Chapter 7. Using the TV with a Personal Computer
Computer Display Formats
RepeatedlypresstheFORMATkeytocyclethroughtheTV
displaysavailableforyourcomputersvideosignal.
Computer Signal As Displayed on TV Screen
Format 16 X 9 Standard 4 X 3 Standard
VGA
640X480
WVGA
848X480
SVGA
800X600
WSVGA
1064X600
Format Standard Zoom
XGA
1024X768
PC 720p
1280X720
WXGA
1365X768
(DVI-Dsignals
only)
Format Reduced Standard
SXGA
1280X1024
(DVI-Dsignals
only)
PC 1080p
1920X1080
(DVI-Dsignals
only)
Appendices
Appendix A: Bypassing the Parental Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Appendix B: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Appendix C: Lamp Cartridge Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Appendix D: Programming the Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Appendix E: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Appendices 95
Bypassing the Parental Lock
Afteryousetthelock,youmustuseyourpasscodeto
viewalockedprogram,viewthelockedTV,cancelthe
lock,orentertheParentalLockmenus.
Ifyouforgetyourpasscode,youcanviewthelocked
TVwithoutenteringyourpasscode.Whenyouare
promptedforyourpasscode,pressthenumber9andQV
buttonsontheTVremotecontrolatthesametime.This
processtemporarilyunlockstheTV
WhenenteringtheParentalLockmenu,thisprocess
deletesyouroldpasscodeandpromptsyoutoentera
newpasscode.PressEXITtoexitthemenu.
L
o
c
k

B
y
p
a
s
s

I
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n
s

H
a
v
e

B
e
e
n

F
i
l
e
d

f
o
r

F
u
t
u
r
e

R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
Deactivating the Front Button Lock
PressandholdtheMENUbuttonontheTVfrontpanelfor
overeightseconds.IftheTVisoff,thisactionturnsiton.
IMPORTANT
Cut along the dotted line and file bypass
instructions in a safe place for future
reference.
IMPORTANT
When changing or deleting your pass code,
you must use the remote control included
with this TV. You cannot use a Mitsubishi
remote control from another component or a
universal remote.
Appendix A: Bypassing the
Parental Lock
96 Appendices 96 Appendices
This page intentionally left blank
Appendices 97 Appendices 97
Appendix B: Specifications
Inputs
Description Qty. Signal Type Input Specifcations
Antenna/Cable input 2 RF Fconnector,75-ohm
HDMI (digital video/audio) 2 HDMIEIA-861Bstan-
dardfordigitalaudio
andvideo
HDMIstandardconnector
Video: 60Hz:480i,480p,720p,1080i
24Hz,30Hz,60Hz:1080p
Audio:PCMstereo
Note:Notforusewithpersonalcomputers.
Video/S-Video
(onefront,tworear)
3 NTSC480ionly Video: RCAPinPlug,1.0Vp-p,75ohm
S-Video: Four-PinDINPlug
Y:1.0Vp-p75-ohm
C:0.286Vp-p(burstsignal),75-ohm
Component
Video
(Y/Pr/Pb)
WD-Y57
WD-Y65
2 EIA-770.1&EIA770.2
480i,480p,EIA770.3
720pand1080i(video
standards)
RCAPinPlug(EIA-770.3StandardLevelsand
Timing)
Y: 1.0Vp-p(includessync),75-ohm
Pr: 700mVp-p,75-ohm
Pb: 700mVp-p,75-ohm
WD-57732
WD-65732
WD-73732
3
Audio
Inputs
WD-Y57,WD-Y65 8pairs analogleftandright
audio
RCAPinPlug500mV(fullscale),43-kohm
WD-57732,WD-65732,
WD-73732
9pairs
PC DVI-I Input 1 analoganddigital
video
VGA(640x480,60Hz)
W-VGA(848x480,60Hz)
SVGA(800x600,60Hz)
W-SVGA(1064x600,60Hz)
XGA(1024x768,60Hz)
1280x720,60Hz
digitalvideoonly SXGA(1280x1024,60Hz)
1920x1080(24Hz,30Hz,60Hz)
WXGA(1360x768,60Hz)
Model Projection System Lamp
WD-Y57,WD-Y65
WD-57732,WD-65732
DLP,0.65chip,1920x1080pixelswithSmoothPicture 150-wattVIPtype
WD-73732 DLP,0.843chip,1920x1080pixelswithSmoothPicture 180-wattVIPtype
Reception
Channel Frequency Reception
Over-the-Air:VHF213,UHF1469
AnalogCable:1125
DigitalCable:1135
Channel Type*
OvertheAir: AnalogNTSC,DigitalATSCwithsub-channels(all18videoformats)
Cable:
AnalogNTSC(non-scrambled)
DigitalQAM64and256withsub-channels(non-scrambled)
CableCARD: Authorizedscrambledandnon-scrambleddigitalchannels
*NoteforDigitalChannels:Thechannelnumbersdisplayedonscreenaredeterminedbythebroadcasterorcablecompanyandcanvary
fromthestandardfrequencynumber.Ifthereisnochannel-numberinformationprovidedbythebroadcasterorcablecompany,theTV
createsachannelnumber.Thecreatedchannelnumberusesthefrequencynumberasthemainchannelnumberandtheprogramnumber
asthesub-channelnumber.WhenusinganauthorizedCableCARD,thechannelnumbersaredeterminedbythecablecompany.
Appendix B: Specifications, continued
IEEE 1394 System Compatibility
ThistelevisionisdesignedtoconformtoIEEE1394AV/CSoftwarestandardsineffectatthetimeofdevelopment.
Thisnetworkingandcontroltechnologyisdesignedtoprovidehigh-performancedigitalconnectionsandproduct
control,makingtheproducteasiertouse.
MitsubishiD-VHSVCRsarefullycompatiblewiththisTVinaudio,video,andcontrol.
AsothermanufacturersdistributeproductsthatusetheIEEE1394AV/Cstandards,theywillberesponsiblefor
developingproductsthatmeetthestandardsofthetechnology,aswellascompatibilitytestingwithotherproducts.
Mitsubishicannotberesponsiblefortheirefforts,andthereforecannotpromisecompatibilitywiththeseotherprod-
ucts.Anycompatibilityproblemswithothermanufacturersproductsshouldbebroughttotheattentionofthose
manufacturers.
HDMI
TheHDMIinputiscompliantwithEIA-861Bstandardsforstandard,extended,andhigh-definitionvideo;digitalaudio,
andHDCPcopyprotection.TheHDMIinputsonthisTVarenotintendedforusewithpersonalcomputersordevices
outputtingvideosignalswithcomputerresolutions.
Outputs
Description Qty. Output Specifcations
Video 1
Video:RCAPinPlug1.0Vp-p,75-ohm
SignalType:NTSC480ionly
Audio (Signal)
2
pairs
RCAPinPlug,500mVrms+200mV(fullscale)foranalogsources,1.5
Vrms+0.5Vrms(fullscale)fordigitalsources.
Audio (Speakers) 2 5.5"x2.2"
Digital Interfaces
Digital Audio Output 1 RCAPinPlug,SignalType,DolbyDigital,PCM
IEEE 1394 (input/output)
(2rear)
2 IEEE1394Four-Pin-TypeTerminal,S400
Physical Characteristics and Power Consumption
Model
Dimensions (inches)
Weight Power Consumption
Height Width Depth
WD-Y57 363/16 511/2 1715/16 85.8lbs. 250w
WD-Y65 403/4 581/2 1913/16 99.0lbs. 250w
WD-57732 363/16 511/2 1715/16 85.8lbs. 255w
WD-65732 403/4 581/2 1913/16 99.0lbs. 255w
WD-73732 443/4 697/8 215/16 190.0lbs. 290w
CAUTION
BURN DANGER!
During normal operation, the surfaces inside
the TV near the lamp are extremely hot.
TOUCH THE LAMP CARTRIDGE BY THE HANDLE ONLY
Do not touch the glass parts of the lamp cartridge.
CAUTION: If the television is on, press POWER to turn it off. Unplug the television and allow
it to cool for at least one hour before attempting to replace the lamp cartridge.
Lamp
Thelightsourceforthistelevisionisalamp,whichispartofalampcartridgeassembly.Thelifeofthelampcanvary,
basedonthelampitself,theairtemperaturearoundtheTVwhileitisoperating,andyourviewingpatterns.Warmerair
orpoorventilationshortenthelamplife,asdoesturningthetelevisiononandofffrequently.Mitsubishiwarrantsthe
lampforone(1)yearfromthedateoforiginalTVpurchaseatretail.
To Order a New Lamp
To Receive a Replacement Lamp Under Warranty
Call(800)553-7278.Pleasehavemodelnumber,serialnumber,andTVpurchasedateavailable.
Important:AlllampsreplacedunderwarrantymustbereturnedtoMitsubishiwheretheywillbeinspectedfordefect
verification.
To Purchase a Replacement Lamp After Warranty
Visitourwebsiteatwww.mitsuparts.comorcall(800)553-7278.Orderanewlampbypartnumberasshownbelow.
TV Model Number Lamp Part Number
WD-Y57,WD-Y65,
WD-57732,WD-65732
915P049010
WD-73732 915P049020
Appendix C: Lamp Cartridge Replacement
WARNING
Donotremovethelampcartridgeimmediatelyafterturningoffthetelevision.Youmaygetburnedbecausethe
lampisveryhot.Allowthetelevisiontocoolforatleastonehourbeforereplacingthelampcartridge.
Donotremovethelampcartridgeexceptwhenreplacingit.Carelesstreatmentcanresultininjuryorfire.
Donottouchthelampglasselement.Itmaybeveryhotandbreak,causinginjuriesorburns.
Besurenottoinsertanymetalorflammableobjectintothelampcartridgeopening,asitmaycausefireorelectri-
calshock.Ifaforeignobjectisinsertedintotheopening,unplugtheACcordoftheTVandcontactyourdealerfor
service.
Installthelampcartridgesecurely.Failuretodosomaycauseafire.
Donottouchthelampglasselements.Oilsfromyourfingersmaycauseprematurelampfailure.
Hg
=MERCURY
THELAMPINSIDETHISPRODUCTCONTAINSMERCURYANDMUSTBERECYCLEDOR
DISPOSEDOFACCORDINGTOLOCAL,STATEORFEDERALLAWS.Fordisposalorrecy-
clinginformation,pleasecontactyourlocalauthoritiesortheElectronicIndustriesAllianceat
www.eiae.org
100 Appendices
Appendix C: Lamp Cartridge Replacement, continued
Figure 1.
WARNING
THECOVERISPROVIDEDWITHANINTERLOCKTO
REDUCETHERISKOFEXCESSIVEULTRAVIOLET
RADIATION.DONOTDEFEATITSPURPOSE
ORATTEMPTTOSERVICETHETVWITHOUT
REMOVINGTHECOVERCOMPLETELY.
Removing the Old Lamp Cartridge
1. TurnoffTVpowerandallowthelamptocoolforat
leastonehourbeforeproceeding.
2. Afterthelamphascooled,removethecover.Refer
tofigure1.Usea#2(large)Phillipsscrewdriverto
removethetwoscrewssecuringthecover.Keepthe
screwsandcoverforre-installation
3. Withalargeflat-bladescrewdriver,loosenthetwoshiny
screwssecuringthelampcartridgeuntiltheydisengage
fromthematingthreads.Thesearecaptivescrewsand
cannotbeseparatedfromthelampcartridge.
4. Fullyopenupthebagsuppliedwiththereplacement
lampandsettheopenedbagaside.
5. Gentlygraspthehandleofthelampcartridgeandpull
theoldcartridgestraightout.Seefigures1and2.
CAUTION: Donottiltorrotatethecartridge,as
smallglassfragmentsmayfallout.
6. Withouttiltingorputtingdownthelampcartridge,
insertitintotheopenedbag.Closethebagwhile
beingcarefulnottoletanyglassparticlesfallout.
Installing the New Lamp Cartridge
1. Donottouchtheglasspartsofthenewlampcar-
tridge.InsertthenewcartridgeintotheTVusingthe
followingguidelines:
a. Refertofigures3and4andnotethelocationof
thetopandbottomguidesinsidethelampcom-
partmentandthecorrespondinggroovesonthe
topandundersideofthelamp.
b. Holdthelampcartridgelevelwiththelampcom-
partment,orientedasshowninfigure5.
c. Alignthegroovesonthecartridgewiththetop
andbottomguidesinthelampcompartment.See
figure5.
Handle
(step 5)
d. Carefullypushinthecartridgeuntilitisfully
seated.Ifthecartridgedoesnotslidein
smoothly,gentlywigglethehandlefromsideto
sidewhilepushingin.

Figure 5
Guide in lamp
compartment
2. Witheitheryourfingersorthescrewdriver,gently
tightenthetwoshinyscrews.Ifusingascrewdriver,
useonlytwofingersforfinaltightening.AVOID
OVERTIGHTENING!
3. Replacetheplasticcoverandretainingscrews.
4. WASHYOURHANDSTHOROUGHLY,ASTHIS
LAMPCONTAINSMERCURY.
Disposal of the Old Lamp Cartridge
Lamp under warranty:Alllampsreplacedunderwar-
rantymustbereturnedtoMitsubishi.Usethereturn
shippinglabelprovidedandsendtoMitsubishiDigital
Electronics,America,1001CherryDrive,Suite2,Brasel-
ton,GA30517.
IMPORTANT: Lamps found to be without defect will
be returned and charged back to the sender.
Lamp no longer under warranty: Contactyour
localauthoritiesortheElectronicIndustriesAllianceat
www.eiae.comforlamp-disposalorrecyclinginstructions.
Donotdisposeoftheoldlampwithcommontrash.
Figure 3
Figure 2
Figure 4
Guides inside the
lamp compartment
Grooves are on the top and
underside of the lamp cartridge
Appendices 101
ThisappendixexplainshowtoprogramtheTVsremote
controltooperateotherA/Vdevices.Thisisdistinctfrom
NetCommandLearning.Tosummarize:theTVsremote
controlcanbemadetooperateotherdevicesbytwodif-
ferentmethods:
RemoteControlProgramming:youmustmove
theslideswitchtothepositionspecifictothetype
ofdevice.
NetCommandLearning:youcanoperate
otherdeviceswiththeslideswitchintheTVposi-
tion.PositionIRemittersinfrontoftheother
devicesandteachthedevicesIRsignalstothe
TV.
Functions Available for Other A/V Devices
TheTVsremotecontrolcanbeprogrammedtooperate
othertypesandbrandsofA/Vproducts.Tousethe
remotewhenprogrammed,set the slide switch to the
position labelled for the product type.Thefunctions
performedineachswitchpositioncanvarydependingon
theproduct.Notallfunctionsworkforallmodels.The
mostcommonfunctionsavailablearelistedonthispage.
IMPORTANT
Some manufacturers may change their
products or they may use more than one
remote control system. The TVs remote
control may be unable to operate your A/V
equipment in these cases.
Set the remote controls slide
switch to the type of device you
wish to program or control.
VCRs and DVRs
CH /
POWER
SLEEP
(FAST FORWARD)
(PAUSE)
(PLAY)
(RECORD)
(REVERSE)
(STOP)
09NumberButtons
MitsubishiVCRsarecompatiblewithsomeadditional
buttons.
Cable Boxes and Satellite Receivers
AUDIO
CANCEL(onsome
models)
CH /
ENTER(onsomemodels)
GUIDE(onsomemodels)
PG /
POWER
(onsome
models)
VIDEO
09NumberButtons(on
somemodels)
F1F4(A,B,C,Dkeyson
somemodels)
Therecord/playbackkeys
(onsomemodels):
(FAST FORWARD)
(PAUSE)
(PLAY)
(RECORD)
(REVERSE)
(STOP)
A/V Receivers
MUTE
POWER
SLEEP
VOLUME
09NumberButtons
DirectInputSelection
buttons:numbers,
FAVandQV(onsome
Mitsubishimodels)
CD Players
(notallfunctionsforallmodels)
SLEEP
(FAST FORWARD)
(PAUSE)
(PLAY)
(REVERSE)
(STOP)
09NumberButtons
DVD and Laser Disc Players
(notallfunctionsforallmodels)
CANCEL(onsome
models)
CH / (fortrack
skiponsomemodels)
ENTER
MENU
POWER
SLEEP
(onsome
models)
(FAST FORWARD)
(PAUSE)
(PLAY)
(RECORD)
(REVERSE)
(STOP)
0-9NumberButtons(on
somemodels)
Appendix D: Programming the Remote Control
102 Appendices
IMPORTANT
You may need to reprogram the remote
control after changing the batteries.
Programming the Remote Control
Method 1: Code Entry
1. Movetheslideswitchatthetopoftheremotetothe
positionfortheproductyouwanttocontrol.Referto
thetablebelow.Onlyoneofeachdevicetypecanbe
controlledineachslide-switchposition.
Switch Position Affected Device
CABLE/SAT CableBox
DTVReceiver
SatelliteReceiver
VCR VCR
DVR
LaserDiscPlayer
DVDPlayer/Recorder
DVD DVDPlayer/Recorder
DVR
LaserDiscPlayer
VCR
AUDIO A/VReceiver
AudioAmplifier
CDPlayer*
2. PressandholdPOWERontheremotecontrolforseveral
secondsuntilthebuttonblinkstwiceandgoesoff.
3. ReleasethePOWERbutton.
4. Enterthefirstfive-digitcodelistedforyourequipment.
ThePOWERbuttonblinkstwicewhenyoustartto
enterthecodeandthenonceforeachadditional
keypress.
ThePOWERbuttonblinkstwicewhenyoufinish
enteringavalidcode.
Movetheslideswitchtoanotherpositionifyou
needtostartoverorwishtoexitprogramming
mode.
5. Pointtheremotecontrolattheequipmentandpress
POWER. Iftheproducthasnopoweron/offfunction,
pressadifferentkey,suchas (PLAY), (STOP),
VOL ,or MUTE.
Iftheequipmentresponds,theremotecontrolis
properlyprogrammedtooperatetheequipment.
Iftheequipmentdoesnotrespond,repeatsteps
24withthenextfive-digitcodelistedforyour
equipment.
6. Onceyouhavefoundthecorrectcode,writeitinthe
spacebelowforfuturereference.
Switch Position Device Type Code
CABLE/SAT
VCR
DVD
AUDIO
Method 2: Code Search
Inthismethodofprogramming,youstepthroughthe
remotecontrolsinternalcodelibrarytofindthecorrect
codeforyourA/Vproduct.
1. Movetheslideswitchatthetopoftheremotecontrol
tothecorrectpositionfortheproduct.Seethetable
underMethod1.
3. Presskeys9 9 1
4. Pressthenumber1, 2,or3dependingontheslide-
switchpositionandthetablebelow.
Switch Position Number
CABLE/SAT 1
DVD, VCR 2
AUDIO 3
5. PressCH andPOWERrepeatedlyuntiltheproduct
respondsbypoweringonoroff.YoucanpressCH
tomovebackwardthroughthecodelibraryifneeded.
NOTE: Iftheproducthasnopoweron/offfunction,check
foraresponseusingadifferentfunction.Press
(PLAY), (STOP), VOL ,or MUTEandthenre-
peatedlypress CH / tocheckforaresponse.
6. Whentheproductresponds,pressENTERtosetthe
code.
Code Verification
Todeterminethecodeprogrammedforanypositionof
theslideswitch:
1. Movetheslideswitchtothepositionyouwishto
verify.
3. Presskeys9 9 0
4. Press1andcounttheblinksofthepowerbutton.
Writedownthenumberofblinksasthefirstdigitof
thecode.
5. Repeatstep4forthesecond,third,fourth,andfifth
digitsofthecode.
Appendices 103
Audio Amplifers
Brand Code
Acurus 30765
Adcom 31100, 30577
AltecLansing 31742
Aragon 30765
BelCantoDesign 31583
Bose 30674
Carver 30892
Classe 31462,31461
CurtisMathes 30300
Durabrand 31561
Elan 30647
GE 30078
Harman/Kardon 30892
JVC 30331
Klipsch 30765
LeftCoast 30892
Lenoxx 31561
Lexicon 31802
Logitech 31408
Marantz 30892
MarkLevinson 31483
McIntosh 30251
Mondial 30765
Optimus 30823, 30395, 30300
Philips 30892
Pioneer 30823, 30300, 30257, 30013
PolkAudio 30892
RCA 30823, 30300
Realistic 30395
Sharp 30226
Sony 30815
Soundesign 30078
Technics 30374,30372
Toshiba 30353
Victor 30331
Wards 30078, 30013
Yamaha 30354
A/V Receivers
Brand Code
ADC 30531
Adcom 31617,31616
Aiwa 31641,31405,31388,31347,
31321,31243,30189,30121
Akai 31255
Alco 31390
AMC 31077
AmplifierTechnologies 31584
Anam 31609,31074
ApexDigital 31774,31430,31257
Arcam 31189
AtlanticTechnology 31487
Audiophase 31387
Audio Lock: Universal A/V Receiver Control
WithAudioLockactive,theremotecontroloperates
thevolumeandmutefunctionsoftheA/Vreceiverinall
positionsoftheslideswitch.ActivateAudioLockifyou
normallyuseanA/VreceiverwithyourTVandotherA/V
equipment.
1. ProgramtheAUDIOpositionforyourA/Vreceiveras
describedearlierinthissection.
2. MovetheslideswitchtotheAUDIOposition.
4. Presskeys9 9 3 ENTER
ThePOWERbuttonwillblinktwicetoindicateAudioLock
isactive.
To Reset the Remote Control to Operate Volume and
Mute for the TV Speakers
1. PressandholdPOWERforseveralsecondsuntilthe
buttonblinkstwiceandgoesoff.
2. Presskeys9 9 3 VOL .
ThePOWERbuttonwillblinkfourtimestoindicateAudio
Lockhascleared.
Programming Codes
104 Appendices
A/V Receivers
Brand Code
Audiotronic 31189
Audiovox 31627,31390
B&K 30840,30820,30701
BK 30702
Bose 31253,31229,30639
Brix 31602
CambridgeSoundworks 31477
Capetronic 30531
Carver 31289, 31189, 30189, 30121
Coby 31263
Curtis 30797
Delphi 31414
Denon 31360,31311,31142,30121,
Fisher 31801,31409
Fosgate 31487
GloryHorse 31263
GPX 31299
Harman/Kardon 31306,31304,31289,30891,
30189, 30110
Hitachi 31801, 31273
Integra 31320, 31298, 30135
JBL 31306,30110
JVC 31811,31643,31495,31374,
31282,31263,31058
Kenwood 31570,31569,31313
KLH 31428,31390
Koss 31497,31366
Linn 30189
LiquidVideo 31497
Magnavox 31514,31269,31189,30531,
30189
Marantz 31289,31269,31189,30200,
30189,
McIntosh 31289
Micromega 31189
Mitsubishi 31957, 31922, 31921, 31920,
31393,30176
Myryad 31189
Nakamichi 31555, 31313, 30097
Onkyo 31320,31298,30842,30135
Optimus 31074,31023,30849,30797,
30670,30531
Oritron 31497,31366
Outlaw 31487
Panasonic 31764,31763,31633,31548,
31518,31509,31363,31350,
31316,31308,31288,30309
Philips 31368,31365,31283,31269,
31268,31266,31189,30189
Pioneer 31384,31343,31023,30630,
30531,30150,30014
PolkAudio 31414,31289,30189
Proscan 31254
RadioShack 31263
A/V Receivers
Brand Code
RCA 31609,31511,31390,31254,
31074,31023,30531
Rio 31869
Samsung 31500, 31295
Sansui 31189, 30189
Sanyo 31801
Sharp 31386,31361
SharperImage 31416,31411,31410,31409,
31385,31263,30797
Sherwood 31077
Sirius 31811,31627,31602
SonicBlue 31869
Sony 31858,31759,31758,31658,
31622,31558,31529,31503,
31458,31441,31406,31382,
31371,31367,31258,31131,
31058
Soundesign 30670
Stereophonics 31023
Sunfire 31313
Sylvania 30797
Teac 31528,31390,31267,31074
Technics 31633,31518,31308,30309
Thorens 31189
Toshiba 30135
Venturer 31390,30849
Wards 30189,30014
XM 31414,31406
Yamaha 31375,31331,31276,31176,
30176
CD Players
Brand Code
Aiwa 30157
Akai 30156
Arcam 30157
Audio-Technica 30170
Burmester 30420
CaliforniaAudioLabs 30303, 30029
Carver 30437,30299,30179,30157
Classic 31297
Denon 30873,30034,30003
DKK 30000
DMXElectronics 30157
Emerson 30305
Fisher 31325,30179,30174
Garrard 30420,30393
Gemini 30625
Genexxa 30305, 30032
GPX 31296
Harman/Kardon 31202, 30173, 30157, 30083
Hitachi 30032
Integra 30101
Programming Codes, continued
Appendices 105
Cable Boxes
Brand Code
ABC 10017,10014,10013,10011,
10008, 10007, 10003, 10001
Allegro 10315, 10153
Americast 10899
Antronix 10207, 10022
Archer 10797, 10207, 10153, 10022
BBT 10267
Belcor 10056
Bell&Howell 10014
BellSouth 10899
CableStar 10056
Cabletenna 10022
Cableview 10022
Century 10153
Citizen 10315, 10153
Clearmaster 10883
ClearMax 10883
ColourVoice 10031, 10025
Comtronics 10040
Contec 10019
Coolmax 10883
Digeo 11187
Digi 10637
Director 10476
Dumont 10637
Eastern 10002
Emerson 10797
Everquest 10040,10015
Focus 10400
Garrard 10153
GCElectronics 10207,10056
Gemini 10797, 10015
GeneralInstrument 10810,10476,10276,10011,
10003
GoldStar 10144,10040
Goodmind 10797
CD Players
Brand Code
TAGMcLaren 30157
Tascam 30420
TDK 31208
Teac 30420,30393,30378,30180,
30174
Technics 30303, 30029
TivoliAudio 31553
Toshiba 30299, 30019
Victor 30072
Wards 30157, 30053
Yamaha 31292,30888,30490,30261,
30187,30170,30036,
YBA 30625
Yorx 30461
CD Players
Brand Code
JVC 31294,30072
Kenwood 30826,30681,30626,30190,
30037, 30028,
KLH 31711, 31373, 31372, 31318
Koss 31317
Krell 30157
LG 31208
Linn 30157
LXI 30305
Magnavox 30305, 30157, 30038
Marantz 30626,30435,30180,30157,
30038, 30029
MarkLevinson 31484
McIntosh 30660,30290,30256
MCS 30029
MGA 30083
Miro 30000
Mission 30157
Mitsubishi 30098, 30083
MTC 30625,30420
NAD 30299, 30019
Nikko 30625,30174,30170
NSM 30157
Onkyo 31327,30868,30102,30101
Optimus 31075,31063,30468,30437,
30420,30305,30179,30145,
30087, 30037, 30032, 30000
Panasonic 30752, 30388, 30303, 30029
Parasound 30420
Philips 30626,30274,30157
Pioneer 31087,31063,31062,30551,
30468,30305,30032
PolkAudio 30157
Proceed 30420
Proton 30157
QED 30157
Quad 30157
Quasar 30029
RadioShack 31075
RCA 31062,30764,30468,30420,
30305, 30179, 30053, 30032
Realistic 30420,30180,30179
Rotel 30420,30157
SAE 30157
Sansui 30305, 30157
Sanyo 30179, 30087
Scott 30305
Sears 30305
Sharp 30861,30265,30180,30037
Sherwood 31067,30180
SonicFrontiers 30157
Sony 31364,30673,30605,30604,
30490,30185,30100,30000
Soundesign 30145
Sugden 30157
Symphonic 30305
106 Appendices
DVD Players/Recorders
Brand Code
Adcom 21094
Aiwa 20641
Akai 21089, 20770
Alco 20790
Allegro 20869
AmphionMediaWorks 20872
AMW 20872
ApexDigital 21100,21061,21056,21020,
21004,20797,20796,20794,
20755,20717,20672
AspireDigital 21407,21168
Audiologic 20736
Audiovox 21072,21041,20790
Axion 21072
B&K 20662,20655
Blaupunkt 20717
BlueParade 20571
Broksonic 20695
CaliforniaAudioLabs 20490
CAVS 21057
Cinea 20831
CineVision 20876,20869,20833
Citizen 21277
Coby 21351,21177,21165,21107,
21086,20852,20778
Craig 20831
Cable Boxes
Brand Code
Hamlin 10273,10259,10034,10020,
10009
Hitachi 10011
Hytex 10007
i3Micro 11602
Jasco 10315, 10153, 10015
Jerrold 10810,10476,10276,10024,
10015,10014,10012,10011,
10003
Linsay 10440
Magnavox 10027
Memorex 10000
Motorola 11376,11254,11187,11106,
10810,10476,10276,10014
MovieTime 10156,10063
Multitech 10883
Myrio 11602
Novaplex 10618
NSC 10156,10063
Oak 10019, 10007
Optimus 10021
Pace 11877, 10237, 10008
Panasonic 10107, 10021, 10000
Panther 10637
Paragon 10000
Philips 11305, 10317, 10153, 10031,
10027, 10025
Pioneer 11877,10877,10533,10144,
10023
PopularMechanics 10400
Pulsar 10000
Quasar 10000
RadioShack 10883, 10797, 10315, 10015
RCA 11256,10021
Realistic 10207
Recoton 10400
Regal 10279, 10273, 10259, 10020
Regency 10002
Rembrandt 10011
Runco 10000
Samsung 10144,10040
ScientificAtlanta 11877,10877,10477,10017,
10008,
Seam 10510
Sejin 11602
Signal 10040,10015
Signature 10011
SLMarx 10040
Sony 11006
Sprucer 10021
Starcom 10015, 10003
Stargate 10797,10040,10015
Starquest 10015
StarSight 10422
Supercable 10276
Supermax 10883
Sylvania 10001
Cable Boxes
Brand Code
Tandy 10258
TeleCaption 10221
Teleview 10040
Texscan 10001
TFC 10310
Thomson 11256
Timeless 10418,10040
Tocom 10013, 10012
Torx 10003
Toshiba 10000
Tristar 10883
Tusa 10015
TV86 10063
Unika 10207, 10153, 10022
UnitedArtists 10007
Universal 10207,10191,10153,10056,
10022,
V2 10883
Viewmaster 10883
Viewstar 10258,10063,10027
Vision 10883
VortexView 10883
Zenith 10899,10525,10054,10000
Zentek 10400
Appendices 107
Brand Code
Memorex 21270,20831,20695
Microsoft 20522
Mintek 20839, 20717
Mitsubishi 21521, 20521
Momitsu 21082
Myryad 20894
NAD 20741,20692,20591
Nakamichi 21222
NEC 20785
Nesa 20717
NextBase 20826
NexxTech 21402
Norcent 21265,21107,21003,20872
Onkyo 20792,20627,20503
OptoMediaElectronics 20896
Oritron 20651
Panasonic 21762,20703,20632,20503,
20490
Philips 21354,21267,20675,20646,
20539, 20503,
PianoDisc 21024
Pioneer 21571,20632,20631,20571,
20525
Polaroid 21086,21061,21020
PolkAudio 20539
Portland 20770
Princeton 20674
Proceed 20672
Proscan 20522
ProVision 20778
Qwestar 20651
RCA 20822, 20790, 20717, 20571,
20522
Rio 20869
RJTech 21360
Rotel 21178,20623
Rowa 20823
Sampo 20752,20698
Samsung 21075,21044,20820,20744,
20573,20490
Sansui 20695
Sanyo 20873,20695,20670
SensoryScience 21158
Sharp 21256,20752,20675,20630
SharperImage 21117
Sherwood 21077,21043,20770,20633
Shinsonic 20839, 20533
SigmaDesigns 20674
SonicBlue 21099,20869
Sony 21533,21431,21033,20864,
20533
Sungale 21074
SVA 21105,20860
Sylvania 21268,20675
Symphonic 21268,20675
TAGMcLaren 20894
Teac 20809, 20790
Technosonic 20730
Brand Code
CurtisMathes 21087
CyberHome 21129,21117,21024,21023,
20874,20816
Daewoo 21242,21234,21172,21169,
20869,20833,20784,20705
Daytek 20872
Denon 20634,20490
Desay 21407
Disney 21270,20675
Dual 21085,21068
Durabrand 21127
DVD2000 20521
Emerson 21268,20675,20591
Enterprise 20591
Fisher 20670
Funai 21334,21268,20675
Gateway 21158, 21077, 21073
GE 20815, 20717, 20522
GoVideo 21730,21304,21158,21144,
21099,21075,21044,20869,
20833,20783,20744,20741,
20715
GoVision 21072
GoldStar 20741
GPX 20769,20699
Gradiente 20490
Greenhill 20717
Grundig 20539
Harman/Kardon 20702, 20582
Hitachi 20664,20573
Hiteker 20672
iLo 21348
Initial 20717
Integra 20627,20571
Jaton 21078
JBL 20702
JSI 21423
JVC 21275,21164,20867,20623,
20558
jWin 21051,21049
Kawasaki 20790
Kenwood 20737,20682,20534,20490
KLH 21149,21020,20790,20717
Konka 20721, 20711
Koss 21423,20896,20651
Landel 20826
Lasonic 21173, 20798
Lecson 21533
Lenoxx 21127
LG 20869,20801,20741,20591
LiteOn 21440,21416,21158,21058
Loewe 20511
Magnavox 20675,20646,20539,20503
Malata 21159, 20782
Marantz 20539
McIntosh 21533, 21273
108 Appendices
Laser Disc Players
Brand Code
Aiwa 20203
Carver 20323,20194,20064
Denon 20243,20241,20172,20059
DiscoVision 20023
Funai 20203
Harman/Kardon 20194
Hitachi 20023
Kenwood 20258
Magnavox 20243,20241,20217,20194
Marantz 20194,20064
Mitsubishi 20059
NAD 20059
Optimus 20059
Panasonic 20204
Philips 20194,20064
Pioneer 20059, 20023
PolkAudio 20194
Quasar 20204
Realistic 20203
Samsung 20323
Sega 20023
Sony 20270, 20201, 20193
Technics 20204
ThetaDigital 20194
Yamaha 20451,20217
Brand Code
Techwood 20692
Terapin 21031
ThetaDigital 20571
Toshiba 21154,20695,20503
Tredex 20804,20803,20800,20799
UrbanConcepts 20503
USLogic 20839
Venturer 20790
Vizio 21226,21064
Vocopro 21027
Xbox 20522
Xwave 21001
Yamaha 20545,20539,20490
Yamakawa 20872
Zenith 20869,20741,20591,20503
Zoece 21265
Satellite Receivers
Brand Code
DirecTV 11856,11749,11640,11639,
11609,11444,11443,11442,
11414,11392,11377,11142,
11109,11108,11076,10819,
10749,10724,10639,10566,
10392,10247,10099
DishNetworkSystem 11775, 11505, 11170, 11005,
10775,
Dishpro 11775, 11505, 11005, 10775
Echostar 11775, 11505, 11170, 11005,
10775
Expressvu 11775, 10775
GE 10566,10392
GeneralInstrument 10869
GOI 11775, 10775
Goodmans 11246
Hisense 11535
Hitachi 11250, 10819
HTS 11775, 10775
HughesNetwork
Systems
11749,11444,11443,11442,
11142,10749
iLo 11535
Jerrold 10869
JVC 11775, 11170, 10775
LG 11414,11226
Magnavox 10724,10722
Memorex 10724
Mitsubishi 10749
Motorola 10869,10856
NEC 11270
NextLevel 10869
Panasonic 10701,10247
Paysat 10724
Philips 11749,11442,11142,11076,
10819,10749,10724,10722,
10099
Pioneer 11442
Proscan 10566,10392
Proton 11535
RadioShack 10869
RCA 11392,10855,10566,10392,
10143,
Samsung 11609,11442,11377,11276,
11142,11109,11108
Sanyo 11219
Sony 11640,11639,10639
StarChoice 10869
Tivo 11444,11443,11442,11142
Toshiba 11749,11285,10819,10790,
10749
UltimateTV 11640,11392
Uniden 10724,10722
USDigital 11535
USDTV 11535
Voom 10869
Zenith 11856
Satellite Receivers
Brand Code
AlphaStar 10772
Chaparral 10216
Crossdigital 11109
Appendices 109
VCRs and DVRs
Brand Code
Harman/Kardon 20081, 20075, 20038
Harwood 20072,20068
Headquarter 20046
HewlettPackard 21972
HI-Q 20047
Hitachi 20105,20089,20042,20041,
20000
HowardComputers 21972
HP 21972
HughesNetworkSystems 20739,20042
Humax 20739
Hush 21972
iBUYPOWER 21972
Jensen 20041
JVC 21162,20067,20041,20008
KEC 20278, 20037
Kenwood 20067,20041,20038
KLH 20072
Kodak 20037, 20035
LG 21037
Linksys 21972
Lloyds 20208, 20000
Logik 20072
LXI 20037
Magnasonic 20593
Magnavox 20593,20563,20149,20110,
20081, 20039, 20035, 20000
Magnin 20240
Marantz 20081, 20035
Marta 20037
Matsushita 21162,20162,20035
MediaCenterPC 21972
MEI 20035
Memorex 21262,21162,21037,20479,
20307,20240,20209,20162,
20104,20048,20047,20046,
20039, 20037, 20035, 20000
MGA 20240,20061,20043
MGNTechnology 20240
Microsoft 21972
Mind 21972
Minolta 20105,20042
Mitsubishi 20443,20242,20214,20173,
20075,20067,20061,20043
Motorola 20048,20035
MTC 20240,20000
Multitech 20072, 20000
NEC 20104,20067,20041,20040,
20038
Nikko 20037
Nikon 20034
NiveusMedia 21972
Noblex 20240
Northgate 21972
Olympus 20035
Onkyo 20222
Optimus 21262,21162,21062,21048,
20593,20432,20162,20104,
20048,20037
VCRs and DVRs
Brand Code
ABS 21972
Admiral 20479,20209,20048
Adventura 20000
Aiko 20278
Aiwa 20307,20124,20037,20000
Akai 20242,20175,20106,20061,
20041
Alienware 21972
AmericaAction 20278
AmericanHigh 20035
Asha 20240
Audiovox 20278, 20037
Beaumark 20240
Bell&Howell 20104
Broksonic 20479,20295,20209,20184,
20121, 20002
Calix 20037
Canon 20035
Capehart 20020
Carver 20081
CCE 20278, 20072
Citizen 20278, 20037
Colt 20072
Craig 20271,20240,20072,20047,
20037
CurtisMathes 20760,20162,20060,20041,
20035
Cybernex 20240
CyberPower 21972
Daewoo 20637,20561,20278,20045,
20020
Daytron 20020
Dell 21972
Denon 20042
DirecTV 20739
Durabrand 20039, 20038
Dynatech 20000
Electrohome 20043,20037
Electrophonic 20037
Emerex 20032
Emerson 21593,20637,20593,20561,
20479,20295,20278,20212,
20209,20208,20184,20121,
20068,20061,20043,20037,
20036,20002,20000
Fisher 20104,20066,20054,20047
Fuji 20035, 20033
Funai 21593, 20593, 20000
Garrard 20000
Gateway 21972
GE 20761,20760,20240,20202,
20060,20035
GoVideo 20643,20526,20432,20240
GoldStar 20038, 20037
Gradiente 20000
HarleyDavidson 20000
110 Appendices
VCRs and DVRs
Brand Code
Optonica 20062
Orion 20479,20295,20209,20184,
20002
Panasonic 21262,21162,21062,20616,
20225,20162,20077,20035
Penney 20240,20054,20042,20040,
20038, 20037, 20035
Pentax 20105,20042
Philco 20035
Philips 21181,21081,20739,20618,
20110,20081,20062,20035
Pilot 20037
Pioneer 20067
PolkAudio 20081
Portland 20020
Profitronic 20240
Proscan 20761,20760,20202,20060
Protec 20072
Pulsar 20039
Quarter 20046
Quartz 20046
Quasar 21162,20162,20077,20035
RadioShack 21037, 20000
Radix 20037
Randex 20037
RCA 20880,20761,20760,20240,
20202,20149,20106,20105,
20077,20060,20042
Realistic 20104,20066,20062,20048,
20047,20046,20037,20035,
20000
ReplayTV 20616,20614
Ricavision 21972
Ricoh 20034
Runco 20039
Salora 20075
Samsung 20739,20240,20045
Samtron 20643
Sanky 20048,20039
Sansui 20479,20271,20209,20067,
20041,20000
Sanyo 20240,20159,20104,20047,
20046
Scott 20212,20210,20184,20121,
20045,20043
Sears 20105,20104,20066,20054,
20047,20046,20042,20037,
20035, 20000
Sharp 20848,20062,20048
Shintom 20072
Shogun 20240
Singer 20072
SonicBlue 20616,20614
Sony 21972,21032,20636,20035,
20034,20033,20032,20000
Stack9 21972
VCRs and DVRs
Brand Code
STS 20042
Sylvania 21593, 20593, 20110, 20081,
20043,20035,20000
Symphonic 21593, 20593, 20000
Systemax 21972
TagarSystems 21972
Tatung 20041
Teac 20041,20000
Teknika 20037, 20035, 20000
Thomas 20000
Tivo 21503,20739,20636,20618
TMK 20240,20208,20036
Toshiba 21972, 21503, 21008, 20212,
20210,20209,20066,20045,
20043
Totevision 20240,20037
Touch 21972
Unitech 20240
Vector 20045
VectorResearch 20040,20038
VideoConcepts 20061,20045,20040
Videomagic 20037
Videosonic 20240
Viewsonic 21972
Villain 20000
Voodoo 21972
Wards 20760,20240,20212,20149,
20081,20072,20062,20060,
20048,20047,20042,20035,
20000
WhiteWestinghouse 20637,20209,20072
XR-1000 20072, 20035, 20000
Yamaha 20038
Zenith 21139,20637,20479,20209,
20039,20034,20033,20000
ZTGroup 21972
Appendices 111
Service and Support
Service
IfyouareunabletocorrectaproblemwithyourTV,
consultyourMitsubishidealeroraMitsubishiConsumer
Relationsat(800)332-2119.
DONOTadjustanycontrolsotherthanthose
describedinthisOwnersGuide.
DONOTremovetheprotectivebackcoverofyourTV.
Support
Toorderreplacementoradditionalremotecontrols,
lampcartridges,orOwnersGuides,visitourwebsiteat
www.mitsuparts.comorcall(800)553-7278.
Forquestions:
CallConsumerRelationsat800-332-2119.
E-mail:MDEAservice@mdea.com
Website:www.mitsubishi-tv.com
Important
Alllampsreplacedunderwarrantymustbereturnedto
Mitsubishiwheretheywillbeinspectedfordefectverifica-
tion.
System Reset Button
IftheTVdoesnotrespondtotheremotecontrol,front
panelcontrols,orwillnotpoweron/off,pressthe
SYSTEM RESETbuttononthefrontpanelwithapointedobject,
suchasthepointofapencilorendtipofapaperclip.
ThegreenLEDwillflashquicklyforaboutoneminute.
WhenthegreenLEDstopsflashing,youmayturnonthe
TV.Thechangesyoumademostrecently,beforeusing
SYSTEM RESET,maybelost.Changesyoumadepreviously,
however,arenotlost.
TV Reset Menu
1. SelectanydevicefromtheInputSelectionmenu.
2. PressMENUfollowedby1 2 3toopentheResetService
Menu.CAUTION:AllsettingsexceptV-Chipwillbe
resettotheoriginalfactorydefaults
Read on-screen warnings before proceed-
ing, as some user data or settings may be
erased.
3. PressENTERtoresetTVdefaults.
Appendix E: Troubleshooting
Demo Mode
ThisTVhasademomodeforuseinretailstores.Toturn
offdemomode:
1. PressMENU.
2. WhentheMainmenuappearswithSetuphighlighted,
pressENTER.
3. WhentheSetupmenuopens,press tohighlightthe
on-screenDemo Mode Offbutton.
4. PressENTER.
Appendix E: Troubleshooting, continued
TV Channels
Symptom Remarks
1. TheTVtakesseveralsecondstorespondto
channelchanges.
Itisnormalfordigitalchannelstotakelongertotunein.
PressENTERafterachannelnumbertoavoiddelays.
Usea4-digitnumberforanover-the-airdigitalchannel.
Usea6-digitnumberfordigitalcablechannelsifyourcable
serviceisabletorecognize6-digitchannelnumbers.
2. Youcannotaccessachannel. UsenumberkeysinsteadofCH / .
Besurethechannelyouwanttoviewisinmemory.See
ChannelMenuinchapter5,TVMenuSettings.
CheckthattheTVisturnedtothecorrectdeviceorantenna
forthatchannelbypressingtheINPUTbutton.
MakesuretheParentalLockisoff.
Ifyoucannottunetoavirtualdigitalchanneleventhoughthe
TVhasalreadymemorizeddigitalchannels,tunetotheactual
channelnumberusedbythebroadcaster.Thevirtualchannel
willthenbeautomaticallyaddedtomemory.
3. Nameoptionsarenotavailableforsome
channels.
Onlymemorizedanalogchannelscanbenamed.
4. WhenChannelViewlistisdisplayed,infor-
mationappearsincomplete
Availableinformationissentfromthebroadcasterorcablepro-
vider.Nootherdataisavailable.
General TV Operation
Symptom Remarks
1. AfanisrunningevenwhiletheTVispowered
off.
NormalTVoperation.WhentheTVisoff,internalcomponents
continuetodrawpowerandmustbecooledbythefan.
2. TheTVremotecontroldoesnotwork. Checkthatthebatteriesareinstalledcorrectly.
CheckthattheslideswitchissettoTV.
Benomorethan20feetfromtheTVwhenusingtheremotecontrol.
ProgramtheremotecontroltooperatetheTVorotherdevice.
3. TVdoesnotrespondtotheremotecontrolor
tofrontpanelcontrolandTVwillnotpower
onoroff.
UsetheSystemResetbutton.
4. WhenadeviceisselectedfromtheInput
Selectionmenu,thescreenisblue(nosignal
source).
Makesuretheselecteddeviceisturnedon.
BeginplayoftheVCR.
5. DevicesaregrayedoutintheInputSelec-
tionmenuortheSplitScreenInputSelection
menu.
Arecordingisinprogress.Canceltherecordingtoselectthe
device.
PCsand1080psourcescannotdisplayintheSplitScreen
sub-picture.
6. YouhaveforgottenyourParentalLockpasscode. SeeAppendixA,BypassingtheParentalLock.
7. Ratingrestrictionsarenotworking. OpentheParentalLockmenuand:
VerifythattheU.S.RatingsorOtherRatingssettingisOn.
ChecktheLockTime/UnlockTimetocheckifratingrestric-
tionsaredisabled.
RatingrestrictionsapplyonlytocontentonANT1andANT2,
INPUT13,andIEEE1394inputs.
8. On-screendisplaysappeareachtimeyou
changeafunction.
NormalTVoperation.
9. Cableproviderneedsinformationtostart
CableCARDservice.
Ontheremotecontrol,pressMENUandthenenterthenumbers
999todisplaytheHostIDandCableCARDIDinformation.
Picture
Symptom Remarks
1. Picturedoesnotlooklikeahigh-definition
picture.
Notallsignalsarehigh-definitionsignals.Toreceivehigh-defini-
tionprogrammingfromyourcableorsatelliteprovider,youmust
subscribetotheprovidershigh-definitionservice.Someover-
the-airbroadcastsareinhigh-defnitionandcanbereceivedwith
ahigh-qualityantennasuitedtoyourlocation.
2. Pictureisgettingdimmerovertime. Thelampisnearingtheendofitslife.Orderanewlamp.See
AppendixCfororderinginformationandreplacementinstruc-
tions.
3. SplitScreendoesnotdisplayasub-picture. MakesuretheParentalLockisoff.
Notallinputscanbedisplayedasasub-picture.
4. CableCARDchannelisnotshownasSplit
Screensub-picturewhenCableCARD
channelisthemainimage.
CableCARDallowsonlyonechannelatatimetobeused.
5. Thereisalargeblackorgrayrectangleon
thescreen.
TheTVsanalogclosedcaptioninghasbeensettotextmodein
theCaptionsmenu.Turnoffbecausethereisnotextinformation
beingbroadcast.
6. Youcannotviewapicturewhenplayinga
VHStape.
CheckyourVCRsownersguideforfurthertroubleshooting.
7. VCRorDVDplayerson-screenmenusjitter
upanddown.
Possiblecause:ManyVCRsandDVDplayersprovideon-screen
menusatonlyhalf-resolution.Theselower-resolutiongraphics
mayappeartojitterupanddownwhentheTVconvertsthemto
high-definitiongraphics.
8. WhenviewingastoppedVCR,whitelines
arerollingonthescreen.
TurnoffvideomutefortheVCR.
Beginplayingthetape.
ChangetheVCRinputtotheantennainput.
TV Power On/Off
Symptom Remarks
1. TVtakesanexcessivelylongtimetopower
on.
Whenswitchedon,theTVneedstimetobootup,justasa
computerdoes.Also,theTVslamprequiresafewmoments
toheatuptofullbrightness.
TVEnergyModeissettoLowPower.TochangeTVEnergy
ModetoFastPowerOn:PressMENU,opentheSetupmenu,
highlighttheFastPowerOnradiobutton,pressENTER.
2. YoucannotprogramtheTVtoturnonauto-
matically(Timerfunction)
TheTVmaybelocked.
Theclockmaynotbeset.
Atime-delayedrecordingmayhavestarted.
TVEnergyModeissettoLowPower.ChangetoFastPower
OninSetupmenu.
3. TheTVwillnotturnonafterbeingpluggedin. Ifgreenlightonfrontpanelisblinking,waitforatleastoneminute
forthelighttoturnoff,thenpressPOWERagain.
4. TVturneditselfoffandthelightonthefront
panelstartedtoblink.
MomentarypowerfluctuationcausedtheTVtoturnoffto
preventdamage.Waitforthegreenlighttostopflashingand
turntheTVonagain.
IftheTVdoesnotstayon,usetheSystemResetbuttonon
thefrontpanel.Ifthishappensfrequently,obtainanACline
powerconditioner/surgeprotector.
Anunusualdigitalsignalmayhavebeenreceived,triggeringa
protectioncircuit.WaitforthelighttostopflashingandturnTV
on.
5 TVwillnotpoweroff. UsetheSystemResetbutton.
Sound
Symptom Remarks
1. Thereisnosoundevenwhenthevolumeis
turnedup.
CheckiftheMUTEbuttonison.
TheTVsListento:settingmaybesettoSAP.
CheckthattheTVSpeakerssettingisOnintheAudio/Videomenu.
IfusinganA/Vreceiver,checkaudiosourceinInputSelection
menu.
PerformaSystemReset.
2. Thesounddoesnotmatchthescreen
picture.
TheTVsListento:settingmaybesettoSAP.
IfusingstereoorA/Vreceiverspeakers,checktheirinput
selection.
IfusingstereoorA/Vreceiver,checkthatDIGITALAUDIO
OUTand/orAUDIOOUTLEFT/RIGHTonTVsbackpanelis
connectedtotheA/Vreceiver.
NetCommandissetupincorrectly.
Indicators
Symptom Remarks
1. Lampindicatorlightisaconstantred. TurntheTVoffforatleast2minutes.Turnitbackon.Iflight
isstillred,thelamphasfailed.Replaceit.SeeAppendixC
forlampreplacementinformation.Forquestions,pleasecall
MitsubishiConsumerrelationsat(800)332-2119.
2. Lampindicatorlightisaflashingyellow. Lampcoverdoorisopenorlampcartridgeisnotsecure.See
AppendixCforlampreplacementinformation.
3. Statusindicatorlightisasteadyyellow. Roomtemperaturehasexceededproperlevels.Cooltheroom.
4. Statusindicatorlightisasteady/flashingred. Serviceisrequired.ContactyourdealeroraMitsubishiAutho-
rizedServiceCentertoarrangeforaserviceevaluation.Listingsof
MitsubishiAuthorizedServicelocationscanbeobtainedfromour
website,www.mitsubishi-tv.comorbycalling1-800-332-2119.
Picture
Symptom Remarks
9. Screenisblackwhentryingtoviewdigital
channelsorIEEE1394device.
ThePerfectColorcolorbalancehasbeenincorrectlyset.Press
VIDEOrepeatedlyuntilyouseethePerfectColoroptionandpress
ENTERtoopenthePerfectColormenu.
10. DVCRanalog/digitalproblems. Ifthetapeiscurrentlyplayingbutnopicturedisplays,theremaybe
amismatchofthemediawiththedisplay.PressINPUTtodisplay
theInputSelectionmenu.PressENTERfortheDVCRdevice.If
digitalisselected,tryanalog,orifanalogisselected,trydigital.
11. CannotseeapicturefromaDVCamcorder. TheTVcannotprocessDVsignals.Useanalogaudioandvideo
connections.
Memory Card Reader
Symptom Remarks
1. TVisnotrespondingafterpullingouta
memorycardduringplayback.
PressSTOPorwaituntilplaybackiscompletebeforeremov-
ingmemorycard.
TurntheTVofffor5to10secondsandthenturnitbackon.
ResettheTVusingtheSYSTEMRESETbutton.
2. CantseeathumbnailpictureintheJPEG
menu,orcantseeatrack/songnameinthe
Playlistmenu.
Filedoesnotmeetfilestandardsforplayback.
3. TVcantplayorstopamemorycard. TurntheTVoffandthenbackon.
Somecardstakelongertoreadthanothers.Ifcardreader
LEDisblinking,waituntilblinkingstopsandtryagain.
IEEE 1394 Devices
Symptom Remarks
1. Excessivedigitalartifactsappearwhen
viewinganIEEE1394device.
TheIEEE1394cableistoolong;15feetbetweendevicesis
themaximum.
TheremaybeaslowdeviceinthemiddleoftheIEEE1394
network.Movetheslowdevicestotheendsothatconnec-
tionsforfasterdevicesdonotpassthroughthem.
2. D-VHSrecordingsfordigitalcablehave
drop-outs(lossofpictureorsound),orno
playback.
DigitalcablesignalsonIEEE1394canexceedthedataratestan-
dardssupportedbyDVCR.
IEEE 1394 Recording
Symptom Remarks
1. Programtoberecordedwascorrectly
selectedfromChannelView,however,incor-
rectprogramwasrecorded.
Thebroadcastersuppliedprograminformationthatwasincorrect
and/orwaschangedafterarecordingwasaddedtotheRecord
List.
2. IncompleteChannelViewprogramrecorded. Recordingdevicemaylacksufficientblankspacetomakeafull
recording.
3. ChannelViewprogramrecordingfailed. ConnectionandcompatibilityissueswithIEEE1394
(FireWire)digitaldevices.Thismayincludetoomany
Firewiredevicesinuseatonetime,ortherecordingdevice
notunderstandingtherecordcommand.
Televisionlostpowerlongenoughtolosecurrentclocktime.
AnalogVCRpowerwasleftoff.
TVenergyModewassettoLowPower.ChangeTVEnergy
modetoFastPowerOn.PressMENU,opentheSetupmenu,
highlighttheFastPowerOnradiobutton,pressENTER.
4. CannotrecordtoorfromtheIEEE1394
device,includingdubbedrecordings.
ToinitiatearecordingtoIEEE1394device,pressthe
(RECORD)key.TheRecordmenudisplaysallowingsetupof
therecording.
Thesourcedevicefortherecordingisnotpoweredon.
Whendubbing,thedestinationdevicefortherecordingisnot
poweredon.
Thewrongmedium(analogtapefordigitalrecording,or
digitaltapefortheanalogrecording)isinthedevice.
Theprogramiscopyprotected.
Theprogramhasalreadybeenrecordedonceandthecopy
protectiononlyallowsonerecording.
Unapprovedsourcedeviceforcopyprotectedmaterial.
Therecordingdevicecannotdecodethecopyrightsignal
includedinthesignalsource(tryanotherdeviceifavailable).
Theplayingdevice(fordubbing)doesnotsupportcopy-
rightedmaterial.
Sourceforrecordingiscopyrighted
ToomanyIEEE1394devicesinnetwork.Insufficientband-
widthavailable.Disconnectunuseddevices.
SourceDevicehashighercommunicationspeed(S400)than
recorddevice.Ifpossible,reversedevices,playintheslower
deviceandrecordinthefasterdevice.
IEEE 1394 Devices
Symptom Remarks
3. ThereisnoaudioandvideofromtheIEEE
1394device.
Thedeviceisnotturnedon.Turnthedevicepoweron.
Nomedia(tapeordisc)isinsertedintothedevice.
Themediaisblank(hasnorecording).
Theplaycommandfailed-Trypressingplayagainonthe
devicesremotecontrolorfrontpanel.
Thedeviceisalreadyinuse(forexample,thedeviceiscur-
rentlyrecording).
Thesourceiscopy-protectedorviolatescopyprotection.
ThedevicesdigitalvideosignalisnotsupportedbytheTV,
asmaybethecasewithanIEEE1394signalfromacom-
puter.Useanalogconnectionsinstead,ifavailable.
Thedeviceisnotanaudio/videodevice.
ToomanyotherdevicesarealreadycommunicatingoverIEEE
1394.Removeorstopsomedevicesandtryagain.
4. TheIEEE1394Deviceisnolongerlistedin
theInputSelectionmenu.
TheIEEE1394plugisdisconnectedorloose.
TheIEEE1394devicehasnotbeenpoweredon.Turnon.
Thedevicehasnotbeendiscovered.
Thedeviceisnotanaudio/videodevice
5. TheIEEE1394devicecannotbeselected(is
grayedout).
Thedevicemaybebusywitharecording.Canceltherecording.
YouhaveconnectedmorethansevenIEEE1394devices.
Unplugtheeighthdeviceandoneotherdevice.Plugthenew
devicebackin.
6. MENUbuttondoesnotdisplayamenu. TheIEEE1394devicedoesnotprovideamenu.
TheTVcannotsupportIEEE1394menus.
7. AllIEEE1394devicesdisappear. Theconnecteddevicesmustnotbeinaloopthatreturnsto
theTV.Makesureadeviceisconnectedattheend.
DisconnectallthecablesanddevicesfromtheTV.Replace
themonebyonetolocatetheproblemdeviceorcable.
UseSystemReset(frontcontrolpanel).
8. AnIEEE1394devicehasbeenpluggedin
butdoesnotappearintheInputSelection
menu(notdiscovered).
TheIEEE1394connectiontotheTVoranotherdeviceisnot
secureorisloose.
TheIEEE1394deviceisnotpoweredon.
AdeviceintheIEEE1394chainisnotpoweredon.Turnon
allthedevices.
Thedevicediscoverycantakeaslongasaminutetoinitiate.
IEEE1394cableistoolong(maximumof15feetbetween
devices).
TheIEEE1394deviceusesanincompatibleprotocolandwill
notbediscovered
9. CannotviewvideofromanIEEE1394DV
camcorder.
Useanalogconnectionsforvideoandaudio.Youcanstillusethe
IEEE1394connectionforcontrolfunctions,however.
10. AnIEEE1394deviceisnotresponding
properly.
Unplugthedevicespowercord.Waitatleasttenseconds
andplugitinagain.
SomeIEEE1394devicesarenotsupportedbytheTV
becauseofincompatiblestandards.
TV Guide On Screen
(see the separate TV Guide On Screen Interactive Program Guide Users Manual for detailed information)
Symptom Remarks
1. TVGuideOnScreensystemshowsno
programlistings.
ProgramlistingsaredownloadedwhiletheTVisoffandthe
cableboxislefton.Itmaytakeupto24hourstobeginto
receiveTVprogramlistings.Itmaytakeuptooneweekto
receivealleightdaysofTVprogramlistings.
InvalidZIPcodewasenteredattheinitialTVGuideOnScreen
systemsetup.SelectNetCommandfromthemainTVmenu,
thenGuideandenterthecorrectZIPcode.
ChecktheconnectionsbetweentheTVandtheTVGuideOn
Screeninput(cable,antennaorcableboxandIRcable).At
leastoneantennaconnectionmustbeassociatedwiththeTV
GuideOnScreensystemtoreceiveprogramlistings.
WhenusingCableCARD,thecablecompanymayhave
convertedtheTVGuideOnScreenhostchanneltoadigital
formatandlosttheinformation.Connectanantennato
ANT2andmemorizetheantennachannelsintheTVSetup
menu.AddANT2totheTVGuideOnScreensetupinthe
NetCommandmenu.Youmaybeabletodownloadfromthe
antennainformationforbothcableandantenna.
2. TVGuideOnScreensystemprogramlist-
ingsdontmatchactualprograms
IncorrectZIPcodewasenteredatinitialTVGuidesystem
setup.SelectNetCommandmenu,thenGuidetoenterthe
correctZIPcode.
Forcableprograms,theremaybemorethanonecable
companyinyourZIPcode.RefertotheTVGuideOnScreen
systemmanualforinstructionsontheSetupService.
3. TVGuideOnScreensystemdoesnot
changechannelsonthecablebox.
CableboxisnotsetupinNetCommand.TheTVGuideOn
ScreensystemusesNetCommandtocontrolthecablebox
andVCR.Tocorrect,selectthecableboxintheInputSelec-
tionmenu,opentheNetCommandmenu,andselectLearn.
Seechapter3,TVSetup.
NetCommandIRemitterisnotinplaceorproperlypositioned
infrontofthecableboxremotesensor.
NetCommand
Symptom Remarks
1. CannotseetheA/VReceivermenu. TheA/VReceiverisnotconnectedtoanyvideoinputoftheTV.
TochecktheA/VReceivermenu,temporarilyplugintoanunused
inputoftheTV,suchasInput3.ExittheAutoInputSensingscreen
andselectInput3fromtheInputSelectionmenu.PressMENU.
2. NetCommandunabletolearnspecificdevice
keys.
DevicedoesnotuseIRformatforremotecontrolsignal.ITT
andRFformatscannotbelearned.
Roomlightingmayaffectthesignal.Havetheremotesvery
close(6inchesorless)totheTVduringLearning.
IflearningaMitsubishiremotecontrol,makesureslideswitch
isnotsettoTVposition.
Some,butnotall,devicekeyfunctionscanbelearnedby
NetCommand.Forexample,POWERandPLAYmaybe
learned,butotherfunctionsmaynot.
Thesignalfromtheremotecontrolmaynotbestrong
enough.InsertfreshbatteriesandtryLearningagain.
3. TheA/VReceiveristheselectedaudio
sourcebutthereisnosound.
ChecktoseeiftheA/VReceiverpoweristurnedon.Afterthe
poweristurnedon,redisplaytheInputSelectionmenuandpress
ENTERtoallowNetCommandtocorrectlyselecttheA/VReceiver
input.
118 Trademark and License Information 118 Trademark and License Information
LICENSORSSUPPLIERSDONOTMAKEORPASSONTOENDUSERORANYOTHERTHIRDPARTY,ANYEXPRESS,
IMPLIEDORSTATUTORYWARRANTYORREPRESENTATIONONBEHALFOFSUCHSUPPLIERS,INCLUDING,BUT
NOTLIMITEDTOTHEIMPLIEDWARRANTIESOFNON-INFRINGEMENT,TITLE,MERCHANTABILITYORFITNESS
FORAPARTICULARPURPOSE.
CableCARDisatrademarkofCableTelevisionLaboratories,Inc.
CompactFlashandCFaretrademarksoftheCompactFlashAssociation.
DCRCertificationLogoisatrademarkoftheConsumerElectronicsAssociation.
DigitalLightProcessingandDLParetrademarksofTexasInstruments.
ManufacturedunderlicensefromDolbyLaboratories.DolbyisatrademarkofDolbyLaboratories.
DTVLinkCertificationLogoisatrademarkoftheConsumerElectronicsAssociation.
FirewireisatrademarkofAppleComputer,Inc.registeredintheU.S.andothercountries.
HDMItheHDMIlogoandHigh-DefinitionMultimediaInterfacearetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofHDMI
LicensingLLC.
ThisproductincorporatescopyrightprotectiontechnologythatisprotectedbyU.S.patentsandotherintellectualprop-
ertyrights.UseofthiscopyrightprotectiontechnologymustbeauthorizedbyMacrovision,andisintendedforhome
andotherlimitedpay-per-viewusesonlyunlessotherwiseauthorizedbyMacrovision.Reverseengineeringordisas-
semblyprohibited.
MemoryStickandMemoryStick PROaretrademarksofSonyCorp.
MicrodriveisatrademarkofIBMandHitachi.
ThisproductincludestechnologyownedbyMicrosoftCorporationandcannotbeusedordistributedwithoutalicense
fromMicrosoftLicensing,Inc.
MultiMediaCardistrademarkofInfineonTechnologiesandlicensedtotheMultiMediaCardAssociation.
The logoandthewordsSimplayandSimplayHDarethetrademarksofSiliconImage,Inc.
SmartMediaisatrademarkofToshibaCorp.
IntheUnitedStates,TVGUIDEandotherrelatedmarksareregisteredmarksofGemstar-TVGuideInternational,Inc.
and/oroneofitsaffiliates.
TheTVGuideOnScreensystemismanufacturedunderlicensefromGemstar-TVGuideInternational,Inc.and/orone
ofitsaffiliates.
TheTVGuideOnScreensystemisprotectedbyoneormoreofthefollowingUnitedStatespatents4,908,713;
6,498,895;6,850,693;6,396,546;5,940,073;6,239,794toGemstar-TVGuideInternational,Inc.and/oritssubsidiaries.
Gemstar-TVGuideInternational,Inc.and/oritsrelatedaffiliatesarenotinanywayliablefortheaccuracyoravailability
oftheprogramscheduleinformationorotherdataintheTVGuideOnScreensystemandcannotguaranteeservice
availabilityinyourarea.InnoeventshallGemstar-TVGuideInternational,Inc.and/oritsrelatedaffiliatesbeliablefor
anydamagesinconnectionwiththeaccuracyoravailabilityoftheprogramscheduleinformationorotherdataintheTV
GuideOnScreensystem.
ChannelView,ClearThought,NetCommand,PerfectColor,QuickView,ViewPointaretrademarksof
MitsubishiDigitalElectronicsAmerica,Inc.
Trademark and License Information
Trademark and License Information 119 Trademark and License Information 119
Mitsubishi TV Software
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR EMBEDDED SOFTWARE
IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY:ThisLicenseAgreementisalegalagreementbetweenyou(eitheranindividualoranentity)and
MitsubishiDigitalElectronicsAmerica,Inc.(MDEA)forallsoftwarepreinstalledand/orprovidedalongwiththistelevision(Software).By
utilizingthistelevisionandSoftware,youagreetobeboundbythetermsofthisLicenseAgreement.
TheSoftwareisprotectedbyUnitedStatescopyrightlawsandinternationaltreatyprovisions,aswellasotherintellectualpropertylaws
andtreaties.TheSoftwareislicensed,notsold.
1. LICENSE GRANT. MDEAgrantsyouanon-exclusive,non-transferable,limitedrightandlicensetouseonecopyoftheSoftware
onlywiththeMitsubishitelevisionmodelthatincludedthisownersguideandownedbyyou.
2. RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS.
SoftwareNotforResale.YoumaynotresellorotherwisetransferforvaluetheSoftware,exceptinconjunctionwithasaleoftheTVthat
Softwarehasbeenpreinstalled.
ProhibitiononReverseEngineering,DecompilationandDisassembly.TheSoftwarecontainstradesecretsorotherproprietarymaterial
initshumanperceivableformandtoprotectthem,youmaynotreverseengineer,decompile,ordisassemble,orotherwisereducethe
Softwaretoanyhumanperceivableform,excepttotheextentthattheforegoingrestrictionisexpresslyprohibitedbyapplicablelaw.
SeparationofComponents.TheSoftwareislicensedasasingleproduct.Itscomponentpartsmaynotbeseparatedforuseonmore
thanoneTV.
NoRental.Youmaynotrent,lease,lend,orsublicensetheSoftware.
Trademarks.ThisLicenseAgreementdoesnotgrantyouanyrightstoanytrademarksofMDEA.
3. VIOLATIONS.Youunderstandthatanyuse,copyingortransferoftheSoftware,exceptaspermittedpursuanttothisLicense,may
subjectyoutoseriouscriminalandcivilpenaltiesincludingdamagesandanawardtoMDEAofattorneysfeesinconnectionwithany
violationofthisLicense.Youfurtherunderstandthatyoumaybeheldlegallyresponsibleforanycopyrightinfringementorotherviolation
ofintellectualpropertyrightsthatiscaused,encouraged,orinducedbyyourfailuretoabidebythetermsoftheLicense.Thislicense
iseffectiveuntilterminated,andwillterminateimmediatelywithoutnoticefromMDEAorjudicialresolutionifyoufailtocomplywithany
provisionofthisLicense.
4. COPYRIGHT. AlltitleandintellectualpropertyrightsinandtotheSoftware(includingbutnotlimitedtoanyimages,photographs,
animations,video,audio,music,text,andappletsincorporatedintotheSoftware),andanyaccompanyingprintedmaterialsareowned
byorlicensedtoMDEA.AlltitleandintellectualpropertyrightsinandtothecontentwhichmaybeaccessedthroughuseoftheSoftware
isthepropertyoftherespectivecontentownerandmaybeprotectedbyapplicablecopyrightorotherintellectualpropertylawsand
treaties.ThisLicenseAgreementgrantsyounorightstousesuchcontent,exceptthatyouownthemediaonwhichtheSoftwareis
recorded,butMDEAanditslicensorsretainownershipoftheSoftwareitself.AllrightsnotexpresslygrantedarereservedbyMDEA.
5. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. MDEAislicensingtheSoftwareforusewithintheUnitedStates.Youagreethatyouwillnotexportor
re-exporttheSoftware.Youspecificallyagreenottoexportorre-exporttheSoftware:(i)toanycountrytowhichtheU.S.hasembargoed
orrestrictedtheexportofgoodsorservices,whichcurrentlyinclude,butarenotnecessarilylimitedtoCuba,Iran,Iraq,Libya,North
Korea,Sudan,andSyria,ortoanynationalofanysuchcountry,whereverlocated,whointendstotransmitortransporttheSoftwareback
tosuchcountry;(ii)toanypersonorentitywhoyouknoworhavereasontoknowwillutilizetheSoftwareinthedesign,development,or
productionofnuclear,chemical,orbiologicalweapons;or(iii)toanypersonorentitywhohasbeenprohibitedfromparticipatinginU.S.
exporttransactionsbyanyfederalagencyoftheU.S.government.YouwarrantandrepresentthatneithertheBXAnoranyotherU.S.
federalagencyhassuspended,revoked,ordeniedyourexportprivileges.
6. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE OR IN THE LIMITED WARRANTY
APPLICABLE TO THE TV, MDEA MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER REGARDING THE SOFTWARE
AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED BY MDEA. IN
NO EVENT SHALL MDEA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTIES, IN CONTRACT, IN TORT OR OTHERWISE, FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE. BECAUSE SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU.
7. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. MDEA SHALL NOT, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD
PARTIES FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, WHETHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
OTHERWISE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY CLAIMS FOR LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF GOOD WILL OR EXPENDITURES
MADE OR COMMITTED FOR IN RELIANCE ON THE CONTINUATION OF THIS LICENSE. YOU AGREE THAT NEITHER MDEAS
BREACH OF THIS LICENSE NOR ITS FAILURE TO REPAIR A DEFECT, ERROR OR BUG SHALL CONSTITUTE A FAILURE OF THE
ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF THIS LICENSE. BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. MDEAs
liability to you for direct damages for any cause whatsoever and regardless of the form of the action, will be limited to the
money paid by you for the TV (based on fair market value of the TV) that caused the damages.
8. GENERAL.ThisLicenseAgreementwillbegovernedbythelawsoftheStateofCalifornia.
WARNING:ThisproductcontainschemicalsknowntotheStateofCaliforniatocausecancerand/orbirthdefectsor
otherreproductiveharm.
120 120
Mitsubishi DLP Projection Television Limited Warranty
MITSUBISHIDIGITALELECTRONICSAMERICA,INC.(MDEA)warrantsasfollowstotheoriginalpurchaserofthis
televisionfromanauthorizedMITSUBISHIAudio/VideoDealer,shoulditprovedefectivebyreasonofagainstdefects
arisingfromimproperworkmanshipand/ormaterial:
a. Parts.Thelenticular(i.e.frontpicture)screeniswarrantedagainstdefectsinmaterialsandworkmanshipforaperiod
ofthirty(30)daysfromthedateoftheoriginalpurchaseatretail.Thelampandallotherparts(exceptanysoftware
incorporatedintothistelevision)arewarrantedforaperiodofone(1)yearfromthedateoftheoriginalpurchaseatretail.
Wewillrepairorreplace,atouroption,anydefectivepartwithoutchargeforthepart.Partsusedforreplacementmay
bereplacedwiththoseoflikekindandqualityandmaybeneworremanufactured.Partsusedforreplacementarewar-
rantedfortheremainderoftheoriginalwarrantyperiod.
b. Embedded Software.MDEAwarrantsthatallsoftwareincorporatedintothistelevisionset(theEmbeddedSoft-
ware)willperforminaccordancewiththefunctionaldescriptionofEmbeddedSoftwareinallmaterialrespects,but
MDEAdoesnotwarrantthattheEmbeddedSoftwareiserror-free.MDEAalsodoesnotwarrantthattheEmbedded
SoftwarewillbecompatibleunderIEEE1394AV/CandHAVisoftwarestandardswithproductsproducedbyanyother
manufacturer.Thelimitedwarrantycontainedinthissectionshallcontinueforaperiodofone(1)yearfromthedateof
theoriginalpurchaseatretail.If,afterpromptnoticewithinthewarrantyperiod,MDEAdeterminesthattheEmbedded
Softwarehasfailedtoperforminaccordancewithsuchfunctionaldescriptioninallmaterialrespectsandifsuchfailure
isnotduetoaccident,misuse,modificationormisapplicationoftheEmbeddedSoftware,thenMDEAshallmodifyor
replacethenonconformingEmbeddedSoftwareatnochargetoyou,whichatMDEAssolediscretionmaybefulfilled
bymeansofmodificationorreplacementsoftwarecontainedonareplacementmemorycardforCustomerinstallation.
TheforegoingshallbeMDEAssoleobligationtoyouunderthislimitedwarranty.Allrightsunderthislimitedwarranty
ontheEmbeddedSoftwarealsosubjecttoyouracceptanceofandcompliancewiththetermsoftheSoftwareLicense
Agreementapplicabletothistelevision,andthislimitedwarrantyontheEmbeddedSoftwareshallbenullandvoidifthe
EmbeddedSoftwareismodifiedorchangedinanymannerexceptasspecificallyauthorizedbyMDEA.
c. Labor.Forthirty(30)daysaftertheoriginalpurchaseatretail,wewillrepairorreplace,atouroption,thelenticular
screenifitprovesdefective.Forcertainitemsthataredesignedtobereplacedbytheconsumer,including(butnot
limitedto)someEmbeddedSoftware,theconsumerissolelyresponsibleforanyreplacementlabor.Forallotherparts,
wewillprovidethelaborforawarrantyrepairbyanauthorizedMITSUBISHIservicecenterwithoutchargeforone(1)
yearfromtheoriginaldateofpurchaseatretail.
d. Notice.Toobtainwarrantyservice,youmustnotifyanauthorizedMITSUBISHIservicecenterofanydefectwithin
theapplicablewarrantytimeperiod.
e.ThisDLPProjectionTelevisionusesasingleDLPchiptocreatethescreenimage.Thistechnologycreatestheimage
usingsmalldots,orpictureelements(pixels).YourDLPProjectionTVismanufacturedtoahighlevelofperformance
andquality,infact,99.99%perfectinthenumberofproperlyfunctioningpixels.Asinotherdisplaytechnology,some-
timesapixeliscontinuouslyactive,inactiveortheincorrectcolor.Ourstandardisclear;MDEAwarrantsonlythatthe
percentageofproperlyfunctioningpixelswillbenotlessthan99.99%ofallpixels.
BEFORE REQUESTING SERVICE, please review the instruction booklet to insure proper installation and correct
customer control adjustment. If the problem persists please arrange for warranty service.
1.TOOBTAINWARRANTYSERVICE:
a.ContactyournearestauthorizedMITSUBISHIservicecenter,whosenameandaddresscanbeobtainedfromyour
MITSUBISHIdealer,bywritingattheaddressprovidedbelow,callingMDEAatthe800-332-2119,orbyusingthe
supportfeatureofourwebsiteatwww.Mitsubishi-tv.com.
b.Warrantyservicewillbeprovidedinyourhomeor,ifrequired,atanauthorizedserviceshop,providedthatyour
televisionislocatedwithinthegeographicterritorycustomarilycoveredbyanauthorizedMITSUBISHIservicecenter.If
not,youmusteitherdeliveryourtelevisiontoanauthorizedservicelocationatyourownexpense,orpayforanytravel
and/ortransportationcoststheservicecentermaychargetoandfromyourhome.Actualservicelaborwillbeprovided
withoutcharge.
c.ProofofpurchasedatefromanauthorizedMITSUBISHIdealerisrequiredwhenrequestingwarrantyservice.Present
yoursalesreceiptorotherdocumentwhichestablishesproofanddateofpurchase.THERETURNOFTHEOWNER
REGISTRATIONCARDISNOTACONDITIONOFCOVERAGEUNDERTHISLIMITEDWARRANTY.However,please
returntheOwnerRegistrationCardsothatwecancontactyoushouldaquestionofsafetyarisewhichcouldaffectyou.
121 121
d.Toobtainareplacementlampduringthewarrantyperiod,pleasecontacttheMDEAConsumerRelationsDepartment
at(800)332-2119.AfterthewarrantyperiodyoumayorderthelampdirectlyfromtheMDEAPartsDepartmentat(800)
553-7278.
2.THISLIMITEDWARRANTYDOESNOTCOVER:
a.Upto.01%pixeloutages(smalldotpictureelementsthataredarkorincorrectlyilluminated).
b.DamagetothelenticularscreenorFresnellens,screenframe,cosmeticdamageortoanyotherdamagewheresuch
damageiscausedbyunauthorizedmodification,alteration,repairstoorserviceoftheproductbyanyoneotherthan
anauthorizedMITSUBISHIservicecenter;physicalabusetoormisuseoftheproduct(includinganyfailuretocarry
outanymaintenanceasdescribedintheOwnersGuideincludingairfiltercleaningoranyproductdamagedbyexces-
sivephysicalorelectricalstress);anyproductsthathavehadaserialnumberoranypartthereofaltered,defacedor
removed;productuseinanymannercontrarytotheOwnersGuide;freightdamage;oranydamagecausedbyacts
ofGodorotherfactorsbeyondthereasonablecontrolofMDEA,suchaspowersurgedamagecausedbyelectrical
systemorlightning.Thislimitedwarrantyalsoexcludesservicecallswherenodefectintheproductcoveredunderthis
warrantyisfound,servicecallsrelatedtounsatisfactoryaudioorvisualreceptionorsignalunlesscausedbyadefectin
theproductthatiscoveredunderthislimitedwarranty,allcosts,expensesoranyotherdamagesarisingfromproduct
installation,orset-ups,anyadjustmentsofusercontrols(includingcontrast,brightness,color,tint,finetuning,sharp-
ness),otheradjustmentnecessarytopreparetheunitfordisplayoruse,connectionwithanyexternalaudioreceiver,
antenna,cableorsatellitesystems,orserviceofproductspurchasedorservicedoutsidetheU.S.A.Pleaseconsultthe
operatinginstructionscontainedintheOwnersGuidefurnishedwiththeproductforinformationregardingusercon-
trols.
3.ANYEXPRESSWARRANTYNOTPROVIDEDHEREIN,ANDANYREMEDYWHICH,BUTFORTHISPROVISION,
MIGHTARISEBYIMPLICATIONOROPERATIONOFLAW,ISHEREBYEXCLUDEDANDDISCLAIMED.THEIMPLIED
WARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITYANDOFFITNESSFORANYPARTICULARPURPOSEAREEXPRESSLY
LIMITEDTOATERMOFONEYEAR.
4.UNDERNOCIRCUMSTANCESSHALLMDEABELIABLETOPURCHASERORANYOTHERPERSONFORANY
INCIDENTAL,SPECIALORCONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES,WHETHERARISINGOUTOFBREACHOFWARRANTY,
BREACHOFCONTRACT,OROTHERWISE.
5.Somestatesdonotallowlimitationsonhowlonganimpliedwarrantylasts,ortheexclusionorlimitationofincidental,
special,orconsequentialdamages,sotheabovelimitationsorexclusionsmaynotapplytoyou.
6.Thislimitedwarrantygivesyouspecificlegalrights,andyoumayalsohaveotherrightswhichvaryfromstateto
state.
MITSUBISHIDIGITALELECTRONICSAMERICA,INC.
9351JeronimoRoad
Irvine,CA92618-1904

122 Index
Index
A
A/VDiscs85
A/VMemoryReset.SeeReset
A/VReceiver
AddingNetCommandControl44
Connecting27
A/VReset.SeeReset
AdjustKeys(Up/Down/Left/Right)48,
60
AnamorphicPictureFormat81
DVDDefnitions54
Playback81
Antenna
AdjustingandtheSignalStrength
Meter64
Connecting23
AntennaInputs(ANT1/MAIN,ANT2/
AUX)16
Audio/VideoMenu61, 72
AudioSettings72
AutoInputSensing39
B
BackPanel(illustrated)16, 17
Batteries35
C
CableCARD12, 16, 18, 37
andTVEnergyMode38
CableBox
andtheRemoteControl48, 84,
101
Connecting22, 25, 28
IEEE139429
Camcorder114
Connecting(Analog)28
DV(DigitalVideo)30, 116
IEEE1394Camcorders30
Power29
CaptionsMenu61, 66
Channels.See alsoFAV
andTVTimer38
Changing35
DigitalChannelNumbers97
Memorizing36
Naming64
StatusDisplay51
ChannelViewChannelListings50
andRecording79
ChannelMenu61, 64
Cleaning7
ClearThoughtAutoInputSensing
39
Clock,SetDateandTime37
ClosedCaptions.SeeCaptionsMenu
ColorAdjustments74, 75
ComponentInputs(YPbPr)17, 73
Computer.SeePersonalComputer
Connecting:HelpfulHints32
ConnectionTypes21
CopyRestrictions85
andNetCommand81
andStatusDisplay51
CroppedPlayback81
D
Date.SeeClock
DaylightSavingsTime37
DemoMode111
DigitalAudioOut17
DisplayFormatDefnitions54
DolbyDigital17, 27, 98
andIEEE139429
DVDs
andtheRemoteControl48, 101
andV-ChipRatings71
DVDPlayerwithComponentVideo,
Connecting27
DVIDevice,Connecting26
DVIJack(forPersonalComputer)17
DV(DigitalVideo)30
E
EnergyMode38
F
F1F4Keys43, 48
FanNoise6
FastPowerOn(EnergyMode)38
FAV65
FilmMode72
FireWire.SeeIEEE1394
FreezePicture.SeePause
FrontPanelLock68
G
GUIDEKey(button)48
H
HDMI
ConnectinganHDMIDevice26
DescriptionofHDMIInputs12
HDMIJack17, 73
PersonalComputerwithHDMI
Output89
RemovetheIconforanHDMI
Device63
HDTVReceiverwithComponent
Video,Connecting21
HD(High-DefnitionSignal)54
I
IconOrderMenu63
IEEE1394Devices
AmpliferSettings73
andAnalogOutputs40, 83
andRecording83
andStatusDisplay51
CompatibleIEEE1394Devices
29
ConnectingIEEE1394Devices
17, 30
TVConnectionSpeed30
ImportantInformationAboutYourTV
6
INFOKeyStatusDisplay51
andNetCommand-Controlled
Devices41
InputJacksonTV(StandardAudio/
Video)16, 73
InputNameMenu62
InputSelectionMenu50
andNetCommand-Controlled
Devices78
RemovetheComputerIconfrom
theInputSelectionMenu88
RemovetheIconforanHDMI
Device63
IR(Infrared)
IREmitterNetCommand31
J
JPEGPictureFiles56
L
LampCartridgeReplacement99
LAMPIndicator.SeeLEDIndicator
Lights
Language
AudioSetting(DigitalChannels)
73
forTVMenus36
LearnFeature(NetCommand)
Description42
DeviceFunctions42
LearnA/VReceiverInputIR
Codes45
Troubleshooting117
LEDIndicatorLights
LAMPIndicator15
POWER/TIMERIndicator15
STATUSIndicator15
Troubleshooting114
LockTV.SeeParentalLock
LowPower(EnergyMode)38
M
MemorizingChannels36
MemoryCards13
MediaSetupMenu57
MemoryCardReader14, 56
MONITOROUTJacks17
Index 123
MP3Audio13, 14, 29, 32
andMemoryCards57
Playback56
Mute
Audio
andClosedCaptions66
andstatusDisplay51
MUTEkey48
VideoMute72
N
NetCommand
A/VReceiverControl43
andtheInputSelectionMenu78
ComparedtoProgrammingthe
RemoteControl101
Description13, 42
InitialSetup42
IREmitters31
Menu43, 62
SpecializedDeviceKeys41
NoiseReduction(Video)74
P
ParentalLock
Bypassing95
FrontPanelLock68
V-ChipRatings71
PassCode
Resetting95
Setting68
PAUSEKey48
andMemoryCards56
PerfectColor74, 75
PerfectTint74, 75
PersonalComputer83
andDisplayFormats54
Connecting89
RemovetheComputerIcon88
Setup88
PictureQuality
andConnectionTypes20
andFilmMode72
Troubleshooting113
PowerConsumption38, 98
PowerOn/Off35, 113
Q
QV(QuickView)48
R
Recording
andMONITOROUTJacks17
andSplitScreen17
CancellingRecordings80
NetCommand-ControlledRe-
cording79
RECORDButton115
RECORDKeyandVCRs82
RecordList79
RecordMenu(SetRecording
Defaults)81
SignalsAvailableforRecording
21
RecordingandTVEnergyMode38
RecordListScreen79
RemoteControl
KeysandFunctions48
ProgrammingCodes(reference
chart)103
ProgrammingInstructions102
Programmingvs.NetCommand
Learning101
Reset49
Reset
A/V(allsettings)14
A/VMemory(forindividualde-
vices)72
DVCRCounter84
PassCode95
PerfectColor74
RemoteControl49
SystemResetButton111
ReviewScreen,TVConnections43,
46
S
S-Video
Connecting22
ConnectorIllustration20
Safeguards8
SAP(SecondAudioProgram)73
SatelliteReceiver
andtheRemoteControl101
Connecting21, 22
IEEE139484
SD(Standard-DefnitionSignal)54
ServiceandSupport111
SetupMenu36, 61
SetUpTV39
SignalDefnitions54
SleepTimer49
SoftwareVersion38
Speakers,TurningTVSpeakersOnor
Off72
Specifcations,TV97
SplitScreen
andRecordingfromMONITOR
OUT 17
Description52
Stand,TV6
Standard-DefnitionSignal54
StatusDisplay51
STATUSIndicator.SeeLEDIndicator
Lights
StereoSystem.SeeA/VReceiver
SystemReset14, 111
T
3:2pulldown72
Time.SeeClock
Timer(TVTimerFeature)37
TimeZone.SeeClock
Troubleshooting111
TVGuideOnScreen
AccessRequirements6
andChannelView79
andGUIDEKey48
andRecording81
andtheRecordList79
andTVEnergyMode38
ConnectionRequirements24, 44
Description13
Setup43
SetupRequirements42
TVResetMenu111
V
VCR
Connecting16, 24, 25
IEEE139429
andNetCommandControl78
Troubleshooting113
VideoNoiseReduction74
VideoSettings74
ViewingDevice.SeeInputSelection
Menu
W
WallOutletCable22
WMAAudio13, 14, 56, 57
Z
ZIPcode44
2006MitsubishiDigitalElectronicsAmerica,Inc. WrittenandPrintedinU.S.A.
853B541B60v3 V33Y/V33+
Website:
www.mitsubishi-tv.com
E-mail:
MDEAservice@mdea.com
For questions, call Consumer Relations at
800-332-2119
To order replacement or additional
remote controls, lamp cartridges, or Owners Guides
Visit our website at www.mitsuparts.com
or call
800-553-7278
Demo Mode
ThisTVhasademomodeforuseinretailstores.
DemomodecausestheTVtodisplayaseriesof
screensoutliningtheTVsfeatures.
Toturnoffdemomode:
1. PressMENU.
2. WhentheMainmenuappearswithSetuphigh-
lighted,pressENTER.
3. WhentheSetupmenuopens,press tohighlight
theon-screenDemo Mode Offbutton.
4. PressENTER.
System Reset
IftheTVdoesnotrespondtotheremotecontrol,
frontpanelcontrols,orwillnotpoweron/off,press
theSYSTEM RESETbuttononthefrontpanelwitha
pointedobject,suchasthepointofapencilorend
tipofapaperclip.
ThegreenLEDwillflashquicklyforaboutone
minute.WhenthegreenLEDstopsflashing,you
mayturnontheTV.

WD Y57

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

WD Y57

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

5.

Home Network Control

Figure 5. Computer resolution, XGA selection

Вам также может понравиться